Ricoh D037 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Copier
  5. D037
  6. Service manual

Ricoh D037 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for D037:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
D037/D038/D040/D041
SERVICE MANUAL
003980MIU

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D037

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D037

  • Page 1 D037/D038/D040/D041 SERVICE MANUAL 003980MIU...
  • Page 5 D037/D038/D040/D041 SERVICE MANUAL 003980MIU...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 9 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 11 LEGEND PRODUCT COMPANY CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN D037 MP C2030 LD520CL Aficio MP C2030 C9020L D038 MP C2050 LD520C Aficio MP C2050 C9020 D040 MP C2530 LD525CL Aficio MP C2530 C9025L D041 MP C2550 LD525C Aficio MP C2550 C9025 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV.

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    2.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........2-5 2.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ............2-6 2.3.3 ACCESSORY CHECK ..............2-6 2.3.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............2-9 Tapes and Retainers................2-9 Developer and Toner Bottles ..............2-11 Paper Trays ..................2-13 Emblem and Decals................2-14 Fax Settings for D037-17 ..............2-14 Initialize the Developer................2-14 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 14 2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..........2-43 Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher........2-43 Internal Finisher Installation ..............2-45 2.13 PUNCH UNIT (D390)................2-48 2.13.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..............2-48 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..........2-48 Removing the Internal Finisher ............2-49 Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher ..2-51 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 15 SD Card Slots ..................2-87 USB Slots ...................2-88 2.22.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ............2-88 Overview .....................2-88 Move Exec ..................2-89 Undo Exec ..................2-90 2.22.3 POSTSCRIPT 3 (D038/D041 ONLY).........2-90 2.22.4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (D038/D041 ONLY)....2-91 2.22.5 IEEE1284 (D038/D041 ONLY)...........2-92 Installation Procedure .................2-92 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 16 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ..........2-112 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............ 3-1 3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES................3-1 3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS ................3-2 3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS........3-2 3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS ........3-3 3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK......3-3 3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK................3-4 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 17 4.4.1 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ..........4-15 4.4.2 FRONT DOOR ................4-15 4.4.3 ITB CLEANING UNIT COVER............4-16 4.4.4 LEFT COVER ..................4-17 4.4.5 REAR COVER.................4-17 4.4.6 REAR LOWER COVER..............4-18 4.4.7 DUST FILTER .................4-18 4.4.8 RIGHT REAR COVER..............4-18 4.4.9 OPERATION PANEL...............4-19 For D038/D041 ...................4-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 18 For D037/D040 ...................4-20 4.4.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (D038/D041) ..4-20 4.4.11 INNER RIGHT COVER ..............4-21 4.4.12 INNER COVER ................4-21 4.4.13 FRONT RIGHT COVER.............4-22 4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER.............4-22 4.4.15 LEFT FRAME AND LEFT FRAME REAR COVER ....4-23 4.4.16 PAPER EXIT COVER ..............4-23 4.4.17...
  • Page 19 4.9.4 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR........4-70 4.10 DRIVE UNIT..................4-72 4.10.1 GEAR UNIT ................4-72 Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit ...........4-73 4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR............4-74 4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T1............4-74 4.10.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T2............4-75 4.10.5 DRUM MOTOR: CMY..............4-75 4.10.6 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: CMY..........4-76 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 20 4.11.16 CLEANING UNIT (OPTION) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 4-98 4.12 PAPER FEED ...................4-100 4.12.1 PAPER TRAY ................4-100 4.12.2 FEED ROLLER ................4-100 Tray 1 and Tray 2................4-100 When reinstalling the feed roller............4-100 4.12.3 FRICTION PAD................4-100 When reinstalling the friction pad ............4-101 D037/D038/D040/D041 viii...
  • Page 21 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR ...........4-121 When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor......4-122 4.14.10 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR ........4-123 Reinstalling the By-pass Paper End Sensor ........4-123 4.14.11 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER ............4-123 4.14.12 BY-PASS TRAY HP SENSOR ..........4-123 4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............4-125 4.15.1 BOARDS..................4-125 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 22 SP Mode Button Summary ..............5-2 Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing....5-3 Selecting the Program Number.............5-3 Service Mode Lock/Unlock ..............5-4 5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES FOR DI-C1 L-MODEL (D037/D040)....5-4 Selecting Programs................5-5 Specifying Values .................5-5 Activating Copy Mode ................5-5...
  • Page 23 5.1.4 REMARKS..................5-6 Display on the Control Panel Screen ............5-6 Others ....................5-6 5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE.................5-8 5.2.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE...............5-8 H-Model (D038/D041)................5-8 L-Model (D037/D040) ................5-9 5.2.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN..............5-10 5.2.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE ..............5-11 Preparation ..................5-11 Updating Procedure ................5-11 Error Messages...................5-12 Firmware Update Error ...............5-12 Recovery after Power Loss ..............5-13...
  • Page 24 5.11 CARD SAVE FUNCTION..............5-36 5.11.1 OVERVIEW................5-36 Card Save: ..................5-36 5.11.2 PROCEDURE ................5-36 For D038/D041 ...................5-36 For D037/D040 ...................5-39 Error Messages...................5-41 5.11.3 ERROR MESSAGES ..............5-41 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. TROUBLESHOOTING ..............6-1 6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ..............6-1 6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS ..........6-2 6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ..............6-3...
  • Page 25 D037/D038/D040/D041 APPENDICES SEE APPENDIX SECTION FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D331 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 SEE SECTION D331 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D366 ARDF DF3030 SEE SECTION D366 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 SEE SECTION D388 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS...
  • Page 26 D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 SEE SECTION D429 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D432/D433 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550/C2530 SEE SECTION D432/D433 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 27 Read This First Important Safety Notices Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer Customer Engineer Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. Reference Material for Maintenance Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,...
  • Page 28 devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source. Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing belts, etc.).
  • Page 29 Safety Devices Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices immediately. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury.
  • Page 30 Ozone Filters Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in the service manual). An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
  • Page 31 injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal. Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
  • Page 32 If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention. If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water. If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash.
  • Page 33 Safety Instructions for this Machine Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
  • Page 34 Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box.
  • Page 35 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 37: Replacement And Adjustment

    PRODUCT INFORMATION APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS D366 ARDF DF3030 D432/D433 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550/C2530 INSTALLATION APPENDIX: OVERVIEW D331 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D425 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX: PM TABLES REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE APPENDIX: PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS TROUBLESHOOTING...

  • Page 39: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION SECTION 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 04/15/2009 Machine Configuration...

  • Page 41: Specifications

    Specifications 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: Mainframe Specifications Printer Specifications Scanner Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Software Accessories Optional Equipment D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 42: Machine Configuration

    H-Model: This is a high grade model. Various expansion functions and options can be used. 1.2.1 H-MODEL Machine Call Item Remarks Code Mainframe D038/D041 D038, D041 Platen cover G329 One from the two; [3] is standard. ARDF D366 Side tray D427 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 43 D432 SAF memory: Memory Unit Type B G578 Requires the Fax Option. For NA model only: Requires Hand Set B433 the Fax Option. Gigabit Ethernet G874 You can only install one of these at a time. IEEE 1284 B679 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 44 PostScript 3 D435-09, -10, -11 these in SD slot 1 at a time Data Overwrite Security Unit D362 PictBridge M344 VM Card D430-01, 02, 03 In SD card slot 2 Browser Unit D430-05, 06, 07 HDD Encryption Unit D377-16 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 45: L-Model

    Machine Configuration 1.2.2 L-MODEL Machine Call Item Remarks Code Mainframe D037/D040 D037, D040 Platen cover G329 One from the two; [3] is standard for NA and EU ARDF D366 Side tray D427 1-bin tray D426 Two-tray paper D331 One from [5], [6], and [7];...
  • Page 46 For NA model only: Requires Hand Set B433 the Fax Option. Copy Data Security Unit B829 Optional Counter Interface B870 Unit D435-03, -04, Printer Enhanced Option You can only install one of these in SD slot 1 at a time PictBridge M344 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 47: Overview

    Overview 1.3 OVERVIEW For "Overview" information, see "Appendices". D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 49: Installation

    INSTALLATION SECTION 2 INSTALLATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 3 ~ 4 02/11/2009 Options 98 ~ 101 02/10/2009 Controller Options 02/11/2009 VM Card 108 ~ 109 02/11/2009 Browser Unit 108 ~ 110 6/13/2011 Browser Unit 108 ~ 109 10/13/2011 Important note Browser Unit...

  • Page 51: Installation Requirements

    Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm.) Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations. 2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 52: Machine Space Requirements

    Ground the machine. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 8 A Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 % Do not put things on the power cord. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 53: Optional Unit Combinations

    Rev. 02/2009 Optional Unit Combinations 2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS 2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS Options Remarks D037/D040 D038/D041 2-tray paper feed unit 2-tray paper feed unit One from No.1 or No.2 1-tray paper feed unit 1-tray paper feed unit (No. 2 requires No. 3)

  • Page 54: Controller Options

    Optional Unit Combinations Rev. 02/2009 2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS Options Remarks D037/D040 D038/D041 IEEE 802.11a/g IEEE 1284 One from six items (I/F Bluetooth Slot) File Format Converter Gigabit Ethernet PostScript 3 Printer Enhanced One of these (SD card Option slot 1)

  • Page 55: Copier Installation

    2.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals. Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets. [1] ARDF: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V [2] Finisher: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 56: Installation Flow Chart

    *1: The shift tray should be installed first if you want to install the shift tray with the 1-bin tray at the same time. 2.3.3 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. For D037/D040 Description Q’ty Destination...
  • Page 57 20. CD-ROM Instruction –Scanner Reference 21. CD-ROM Instruction – Printer & Scanner Reference 22. CD-ROM Instruction – Network & General Setting Guide 23. CD-ROM Instruction – Security Reference 24. Printer Driver CD-ROM -29, 28 25. Scanner Driver & Utility CD-ROM -17, -67, -29 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 58 12. Operating Instruction – Safety Information 13. CD-ROM Instruction – About this machine -57, -67, -29, -21, -19 14. CD-ROM Instruction – Troubleshooting 15. CD-ROM Instruction –Copy/Document Server Reference 16. CD-ROM Instruction –Facsimile Reference 17. CD-ROM Instruction –Printer Reference 18. CD-ROM Instruction –Scanner Reference D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 59: Installation Procedure

    Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location. Tapes and Retainers Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine. Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2. D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 60 For the EU models, the scanner unit stay cannot be inserted in the cutout on the inner tray. You must bring this stay back to your depot. Install the inverter tray [A] (hooks). Open the duplex unit [A]. Remove the sheet [B] of paper with a red tag. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-10...

  • Page 61: Developer And Toner Bottles

    11. Attach the handle cover [A] to the front side of the duplex unit. Developer and Toner Bottles Open the front door [A] and remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [B]. Remove all tapes except the tape [C] from the four development units and from the toner hopper units. 2-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 62 If the toner hopper shutter is not fully closed and the inlet [B] of the toner hopper unit is visible, the toner bottle cannot be installed properly. Press the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it up as shown above. Remove the black PCDU [B] ( x 2). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-12...

  • Page 63: Paper Trays

    Pull each paper tray [A] out. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size. To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green lock at the rear inside the tray. 2-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 64: Emblem And Decals

    Fax Settings for D037-17 The D037-17 model has a fax unit as a standard function. Because of this, the fax settings are required at machine installation. Refer to steps 7 to 9 and 14 to 16 in the "Fax Option (D432) Installation Procedure"...

  • Page 65: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    SP5-045-001 developments or prints. NOTE: You can set “0”: Developments this one time only. You cannot change the setting after you have set it for the first time. A3/11" x 17" double counting SP No. Function Default 2-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 66: Settings For @Remote Service

    Enter the SP mode. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with SP5816-202. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-16...
  • Page 67 Check the registration result with SP5816-207. Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Succeeded Request number error Check the request number again. Already registered Check the registration status. Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. 2-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 68 Service" in User Tools is Embedded RC gate-related set to "Do not prohibit". problem. -12006 A confirmation request was made after the confirmation Execute registration. had been already completed. -12007 The request number used at Check Request No. registration was different from D037/D038/D040/D041 2-18...

  • Page 69: Moving The Machine

    2.3.5 MOVING THE MACHINE This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section “Transporting the Machine” if you have to pack the machine and move it a 2-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 70: Transporting The Machine

    To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12. Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent color registration errors. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-20...

  • Page 71: Paper Feed Unit (D331)

    You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage. 2-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 72 Remove the connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1). Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M3 x 8 each). Re-install the connector cover. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-22...
  • Page 73 11. Load paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size. 12. Turn on the main switch. 13. Adjust the registration for each tray ( Section: Image Adjustment). For tray 3, use SP1002-004 For tray 4, use SP1002-005 14. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality. 2-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 74: Installation Procedure

    Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. The one-tray paper feed unit must be installed on the caster table (D448). Prepare the caster table first before installing this unit. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-24...
  • Page 75 "Caster Table (D488)"” installation procedure. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C]. Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 2-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 76 13. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 14. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 15. Adjust the registration for each tray ( Section: Image Adjustment). Use SP1002-004 16. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-26...

  • Page 77: Caster Table (D488)

    Caster Table Step Screw 2.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Put the caster table on a flat place. Install the two pins in the screw holes. Use the screw holes [A] and [C] if the mainframe is directly installed on the caster 2-27 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 78 Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one-tray paper feed unit. Secure the machine or one-tray paper feed unit to the caster table (step screw x 2) Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one-tray paper feed unit. Adjust the five leveling adjustors of the caster table. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-28...

  • Page 79: Ardf (D366)

    Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty ARDF Stamp Cartridge Knob Screw Stud Screw Attention Decal – Top Cover 2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2-29 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 80 Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C]. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-30...
  • Page 81 Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [B] on the exposure glass. Close the ARDF. 10. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached. 2-31 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 82 13. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (see Section: "Image Adjustment"" in the "Replacements and Adjustments" chapter). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-32...

  • Page 83: Platen Cover Installation (G329)

    2.8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329) Install the stud screws [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen cover [C] to the left. 2-33 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 84: Side Tray (D427)

    Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Side Tray Paper Exit Unit Side Tray Decal: Push Decal: Door Push Screw: M3x8 Tray Stopper 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-34...
  • Page 85 Close the side tray paper exit unit [A], and then connect the harness [B] to the machine. Install the side tray paper exit unit ( x 2: removed in step 3). Install the side tray [A]. Lift the side tray, and then install the tray stopper [B] ( x 1: M3x8). 2-35 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 86 Attach the ‘Push door’ decal [A] to the top front edge of the duplex unit cover. Close the duplex unit, and then attach the ‘Push’ decal [A] to the duplex unit cover. 10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 11. Check the side tray operation. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-36...

  • Page 87: 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

    Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Tray 1-Bin Tray Unit Screw: Blue (M3 x 6) Screw (M3 x 8) Tray Support Bar 2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 2-37 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 88 Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook). Open the right door [B] of the machine. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1). Remove the paper exit cover [A]. Remove the connector cover [A] with a small flat screwdriver. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-38...
  • Page 89 10. Attach the tray support cover [B] ( x 2: M3x8 in the accessories and one screw removed in step 7). 11. Reassemble the machine. 12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine, and check the 1-bin tray unit operation. 2-39 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 90: Component Check

    If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time, install the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray unit may be difficult. Remove all tapes. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-40...
  • Page 91 If the shift tray is difficult to install in the mainframe, remove the paper exit cover [C] first ( x 1). Install the shift tray [A] fully in the machine ( x 2). Reinstall the inverter tray. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. Check the shift tray unit operation. 2-41 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 92: Internal Finisher (D429)

    2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Internal Finisher Inverter Unit Inner Bottom Plate Screw: M3x10 Screw: M3x6 Guide Rail Inverter Cover Left Cover D037/D038/D040/D041 2-42...

  • Page 93: Preparing Before Installing The Internal Finisher

    Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher Remove all tapes from the internal finisher. Remove the inverter tray [A]. Open the front door [B]. Remove the lower inner cover [A]. Press the ITB lock lever [B] and turn it up as shown above. 2-43 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 94 Remove the following: Inner tray [A] ( x 2) Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2) Left frame cover [C] ( x 1) Paper exit cover [D] ( x 1) Inner rear cover [E] ( x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 2-44...

  • Page 95: Internal Finisher Installation

    Internal Finisher (D429) Install the inner bottom plate [A] ( x 6). 10. Attach the left cover [A] ( x 2: M3x6, one screw removed in step 8). Internal Finisher Installation Insert the inverter unit [A] in the machine. 2-45 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 96 Otherwise, paper jams may occur between the paper exit unit and inverter unit. Install the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6). Attach the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-46...
  • Page 97 1: M3x6). Push the internal finisher [A] and connect the cable [B] to the power socket of the machine. Reassemble the machine. 10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 11. Check the internal finisher operation. 2-47 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 98: Punch Unit (D390)

    Drawer Connector Bracket Left Frame Cover Punch Cover 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE If the internal finisher has not already been installed, skip the ‘Removing the Internal Finisher’ section, and go to the ‘Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal D037/D038/D040/D041 2-48...

  • Page 99: Removing The Internal Finisher

    Open the front door. Open the right door [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] ( x 1). Disconnect the cable [A] from the power socket of the machine, and then pull out the internal finisher [B]. 2-49 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 100 Punch Unit (D390) Remove the internal finisher [A] ( x 1: M3x6). Remove the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10). Remove the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-50...

  • Page 101: Preparing The Punch Unit Before Installing The Internal Finisher

    Remove the inverter unit [A] from the machine. Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher Remove the inverter right bracket [A] from the inverter unit ( x 4). To remove screw [B], open guide plate [C]. 2-51 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 102 1: M3x6). Slide the inverter small guide [A] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove it x 1). Remove all the tapes on the punch unit. If all the tapes are not removed, SC763 may occur. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-52...

  • Page 103: Installing The Punch And Inverter Unit

    Attach the drawer connector [A] of the punch unit to the rear bracket of the inverter unit x 2 removed in step 3). Attach the clamp [B] to the rear bracket of the inverter unit. Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit 2-53 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 104 Remove the stopper [A] from the guide rail, and then attach with the screw holes [B] (these screw holes must be used when the internal finisher is installed with the punch unit). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-54...

  • Page 105: Preparing The Internal Finisher

    Install the guide rail [A] on the front edge of the inner bottom plate ( x 2). Install the punch cover [A] ( x 3: M3x6). Preparing the Internal Finisher Remove the left rear cover [A] and the rear cover [B] of the internal finisher ( each). 2-55 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 106: Installing The Internal Finisher

    Gray harness connector to CN17 Reinstall the rear cover (removed in step 1) ( x 2). Installing the Internal Finisher Install the internal finisher [A] in the mainframe ( x 1). Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-56...
  • Page 107 Attach the bracket [A] ( x 2); this bracket is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit. Remove the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher without the punch unit ( x 3). 2-57 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 108 3). Note The two projections [A] on the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to the output tray lower cover) must be inserted along the two guide rails [B] inside the output tray unit. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-58...
  • Page 109 Attach the left frame cover [A] ( x 2). Push the internal finisher in the mainframe. Connect the I/F cable [B] of the finisher to the inlet of the mainframe. 2-59 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 110: Usb2.0/Sd Slot Type A

    Screw: M3 x 8 Decal 2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Connect the USB cable [B] to the USB slot [A] in the USB2.0/SD Slot unit. Attach the ground plate [C] to the bracket of the USB2.0/SD Slot ( x 1: M3x6 blue). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-60...
  • Page 111 Remove the screw [A] first, and the rear cover [B] ( x 7). Remove the scanner left cover [A] ( x 2). Remove the left frame cover [B] ( x 2). Remove the part [A] on the scanner left cover. 2-61 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 112 Route the USB cable [A] through the gaps in the left scanner cover. Secure the USB2.0/SD Slot [B] with the left scanner cover as shown above ( x 4: M3x8). Use the screw holes [C] as shown above. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-62...

  • Page 113: Testing The Sd Card/Usb Slot

    Insert an SD card or USB memory device in the slot. You can connect only one removable memory device at a time. Close the media slot cover. If you leave the cover open, static electricity conducted through an inserted SD card could cause the machine to malfunction. 2-63 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 114 Press [Store to Memory Device]. Press [OK]. Press the [Start] key. When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears. Press [Exit]. Remove the memory device from the media slot. Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-64...

  • Page 115: Mechanical Counter (Na Only)

    Section: "Controller Box Cover " in the “Replacement and Adjustment” section) Remove the cutouts [A] in the rear lower cover with nippers. Attach the mechanical counters [A] to the bracket [B] and connect the harness to each mechanical counter as shown above. 2-65 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 116 Reassemble the machine. 10. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch. 11. Enter the SP mode. 12. Set SP5987-001 to "1: ON". 13. Exit the SP mode, and then turn the machine off and on. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-66...

  • Page 117: Key Counter Bracket

    Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2). Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2). Rear cover ( "Rear Cover" in the Replacement and Adjustment section) Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover. 2-67 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 118 Key Counter Bracket Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket, and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover. Connect the key counter cable [A] to the connector [B]. Reassemble the machine. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-68...

  • Page 119: Key Counter Interface Unit

    Section: "Rear Lower Cover" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section) Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover. Attach the clamp [A] to the DRB bracket. Install the key counter interface board [B] on the DRB bracket ( x 4). 2-69 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 120 Connect and route the harness [B] to the connector on the key counter interface board and connector CN216 [C] on the BCU ( x 5) Pull the key counter cable through from the cutout and connect it to the connector [A] of the key counter unit. Reassemble the machine. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-70...

  • Page 121: Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)

    Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the machine ( x 5). Remove the rear cover [B] of the machine ( x 7) Scanner cable bracket [A] ( x 4) Loosen the eight screws, and slide up the controller box cover [B]. 2-71 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 122: User Tool Setting

    Security for Copying “feature cannot appear in the user tool setting. And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-72...

  • Page 123: Anti-Condensation Heater

    This heater is supplied as a spare part. Rear cover ( Section: "Rear Cover" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section) Open the ARDF or platen cover. Glass cover [A] (stepped screw x 4) Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) 2-73 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 124 Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. Rear scale [A] (stepped screw x 3) Exposure glass [A] with left scale. Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure D037/D038/D040/D041 2-74...
  • Page 125 12. Secure the cable cover [A] and the left side of the heater ( x 1). 13. Attach a clamp as shown above. 14. Connect the harness [A] of the heater to the connector [B] in the frame of the machine. 2-75 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 126 Anti-Condensation Heater 15. Reassemble the machine. 16. Attach the on/standby decal [A] to the left-hand side of the main power switch. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-76...

  • Page 127: Tray Heater (Mainframe)

    Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1). Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1) Reassemble the machine. 2-77 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 128 Tray Heater (Mainframe) Attach the on/standby decal [A] to the left-hand side of the main power switch. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-78...

  • Page 129: Tray Heaters (Optional Unit)

    Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe. Disconnect the harness [B]. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5). Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit. 2-79 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 130 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit ( x 2). Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B]. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1) Connect the heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B]. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-80...
  • Page 131 Make sure that the connector [A] is placed securely as shown above. Make sure that the edge of the tube [B] is placed as shown above. 11. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2) and securing brackets ( each) 2-81 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 132 14. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe ( x 5). 15. Reinstall all the tray cassettes. 16. Attach the on/standby decal [A] to the left-hand side of the main power switch. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-82...

  • Page 133: Tray Heater For D331

    Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5). Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit ( x 2). 2-83 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 134 Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1). Connect heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B]. Remove the harness guide [A] ( x 1), and move it in the blue arrow direction as shown above. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-84...
  • Page 135 Make sure that the edge of the tube [A] is placed as shown above. The clamp [B] is not used. 12. Reinstall the harness guide. 13. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2) and securing brackets ( each). 2-85 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 136 16. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe ( x 5). 17. Reinstall all the tray cassettes. 18. Attach the on/standby decal [A] to the left-hand side of the main power switch. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-86...

  • Page 137: Controller Options

    Gigabit Ethernet. The I/F Slot [B] is only used for D038/D041 (H Model). SD Card Slots D037/D040: ⇒ Slot 1 is used for one of the optional applications: Printer Enhanced Option, PictBridge. Slot 2 is used for service only (for example, updating the firmware).

  • Page 138: Usb Slots

    Left-side USB slot [C]: Used for connecting a digital camera (only works if PictBridge is installed). Right-side USB slot [D]: Used when installing the optional USB2.0/SD card slot D038/D041 has two slots. D037/D040 has only one slot (there is no optional USB2.0/SD card slot for these models). 2.22.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card.

  • Page 139: Move Exec

    Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2.The application program is copied from this SD card. Turn the main switch on. Start the SP mode. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.” Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. 2-89 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 140: Undo Exec

    2.22.3 POSTSCRIPT 3 (D038/D041 ONLY) The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card. However, other applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card. Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-90...

  • Page 141: File Format Converter (D038/D041 Only)

    Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal [A] to the front door. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section). 2.22.4 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (D038/D041 ONLY) Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 2-91 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 142: Ieee1284 (D038/D041 Only)

    2.22.5 IEEE1284 (D038/D041 ONLY) Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). D037/D038/D040/D041 2-92...

  • Page 143: Ieee 802.11 A/G, G (Wireless Lan: D038/D041 Only)

    2.22.6 IEEE 802.11 A/G, G (WIRELESS LAN: D038/D041 ONLY) Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). 2-93 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 144 You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear. Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates strong magnetic fields. Put the machine as close as possible to the access point. Installing Various Hardware Combinations D037/D038/D040/D041 2-94...

  • Page 145: Up Mode Settings For Wireless Lan

    There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. WEP: Selects “Active” or “Inactive” (“Inactive” is default.). Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit: 10 characters 128 bit: 26 characters Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the 2-95 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 146: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 A/G, G Wireless

    Channel MIN allowed for your country. 5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. Used to confirm WEP Key the current WEP D037/D038/D040/D041 2-96...

  • Page 147: Bluetooth (D038/D041 Only)

    Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2). 2-97 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 148: Before You Begin The Procedure

    Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values: Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-98...

  • Page 149: Seal Check And Removal

    You must install the DataOverwriteSecurity unit in SD Card slot 1. However, the Postscript option and others are also installed in SD Card slot 1. You must do the "SD Card Appli Move" procedure first if you want to install the Data Overwrite Security unit. 2-99 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 150 • Diagnostic Report: “ROM No. / Firmware “Loading Program” [b] Version” [a] DataOverwriteSecurity Unit HDD Format Option: GW5a_zoffym: D3775912A / 1.01m D3775912A / 1.01m NOTE: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-100...

  • Page 151: Hdd Encryption Unit (D038/D041 Only)

    [User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication Management"> "Available Settings" "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done. If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure. 2-101 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 152: Seal Check And Removal

    If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-102...

  • Page 153: Installation Procedure

    Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD. Turn off the main power switch. Remove the SD card from slot 2. Attach the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). 2-103 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 154: Recovery From A Device Problem

    10. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board. 11. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status. 12. Remove the SD card from slot 2. 13. Reinstall the HDD unit. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-104...

  • Page 155: Clearing The Nvram

    SD Card slot 1. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the postscript or data overwrite security unit option installed and you want to install the PictBridge unit. 2-105 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 156: Vm Card Type I (D038/D041 Only)

    IMPORTANT: Whenever installing an SDK application on this model (e.g. the VM Card or Browser Unit), the Memory Unit Type I: 512MB must also be installed. Installation Procedure Switch the machine off. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x1). Insert the SD card [B] into slot 2. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-106...

  • Page 157: Firmware Update Procedure

    “Press any key to continue…”appears again, then press “Enter” key. The command prompt screen disappears automatically if the update is successful. Remove the SD card from the SD card writer after the access lamp going off on the SD card writer. 2-107 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 158: Browser Unit Type E (D038/D041 Only)

    - Remove the SD card (VM/JAVA) from SD slot 2. Turn off the machine and unplug the main machine power cord. Turn the Browser SD card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into the slot until you hear a click. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-108...
  • Page 159 HDD. This is because: - The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. - You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. 2-109 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 160: Update Procedure

    18. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with 19. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit. 2.22.13 GIGABIT ETHERNET (D038/D041 ONLY) Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-110...

  • Page 161: Memory Unit Type I 512Mb (D038/D041 Only)

    HDD bracket ( Section: HDD (Only for D038/D041) Unlock the lock levers [A]. Remove the installed memory [B] (256 MB). Push the memory unit [C] (512 MB) until both lock levers lock the memory unit. Reassemble the machine. 2-111 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 162: Check All Connections

    Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page. User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page All installed options are shown in the “System Reference” column. D037/D038/D040/D041 2-112...
  • Page 163 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SECTION 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 165: Preventive Maintenance

    Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: Preventive Maintenance Items Other Yield Parts D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 166: Pm Parts Settings

    Black: 3902-009 Cyan: 3902-010 Drum Unit Magenta: 3902-011 Yellow: 3902-012 ITB Unit 3902-013 Fusing Unit 3902-014 Fusing Roller 3902-015 Fusing Belt 3902-016 ITB Cleaning Unit 3902-017 PTR Unit 3902-018 PCDU Toner Collection Bottle 3902-019* ITB Toner Collection Bottle 3902-020* D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 167: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c). Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a). To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 168: Operation Check

    PM Parts Settings Exit the SP mode. 3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK Check if the sample image has been copied normally. D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 169 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 1/17/2012 Line Position Adjustment 53 ~ 54 01/09/2009 Image Creation 02/04/2009 02/04/2009 Controller 138 ~ 140 02/04/2009 NVRAM...
  • Page 171 If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 172: Special Tools

    B645 5010 SD Card B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs/set) D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 173: Image Adjustment

    Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary. Standard: ±1.0%. Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 174: Image Adjustment

    Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 4.2 ± 3.0 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 3.0 mm for the side-to-side registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 175: Ardf

    Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary. Standard: ±5.0% Reduction mode: ±5.0% Enlargement mode: ±5.0% 4.3.3 REGISTRATION Image Area A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 176: Registration

    3) Input the value. Then press the key. 4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment. 4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 177: Leading Edge

    Also, you can check the result with ⇒ SP 2-194-007 (0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed). You should also do the line position adjustment at these times: After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 178: Adjustment Standard

    For adjusting K ID max: SP4-915-004 For adjusting C ID max: SP4-916-004 For adjusting M ID max: SP4-917-004 For adjusting Y ID max: SP4-918-004 Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 6 matches D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 179 3 through 5 in the (C,M, and Y) copy is seen as gray (no C, <on the full color M, or Y should be visible). If copy> the black scale contains C, M, or Y, do steps 1 to 4 again. D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 180 Highlight (Low ID) show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. For adjusting K Highlight: SP4-909-001 - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - D037/D038/D040/D041 4-10...
  • Page 181 Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not Highlight (Low ID) show on the copy and the (K, C, M, and Y) density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. 4-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 182 For adjusting K Shadow: SP4-914-003 Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does Highlight (Low ID) not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-12...

  • Page 183: Adjustment Procedure

    Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 4-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 184 Image Adjustment test chart. Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, “Highlight”. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-14...

  • Page 185: Exterior Covers

    To do this, set SP 3902 019 to 1 before you start to work on the machine. Open the front door [A]. PCDU toner collection bottle [A] (lock x 2) 4.4.2 FRONT DOOR Open the front door. PCDU toner collection bottle ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) 4-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 186: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers Release the belt [A]. Front door [A] ( x 2, pin x 2) 4.4.3 ITB CLEANING UNIT COVER Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] ( x 2). D037/D038/D040/D041 4-16...

  • Page 187: Itb Cleaning Unit Cover

    Exterior Covers Release the tab [A], and then remove the ITB cleaning unit cover [B]. 4.4.4 LEFT COVER Left cover [A] ( x 10) 4.4.5 REAR COVER Rear cover [A] ( x 8) 4-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 188: Rear Cover

    Remove the screw [B] of the lower cover when reinstalling the rear cover. 4.4.6 REAR LOWER COVER Rear lower cover [A] ( x 5) 4.4.7 DUST FILTER Dust filter cover [A] (hooks) Dust filter [B] 4.4.8 RIGHT REAR COVER Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-18...

  • Page 189: Right Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers Open the duplex unit [A]. Right rear cover [B] ( x 5) 4.4.9 OPERATION PANEL For D038/D041 Remove six screws on the operation panel [A]. Slide the operation panel to the front side. Disconnect the harness [A]. 4-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 190: Operation Panel

    Exterior Covers Operation panel [B] For D037/D040 Remove six screws on the operation panel. Slide the operation panel to the front side. Remove the connector [A]. Operation panel [B] 4.4.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (D038/D041) It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times: When you replace the operation panel.

  • Page 191: Pcdu Toner Collection Bottle

    Press the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it up clockwise as shown above. Inner right cover [B] ( x 2) 4.4.12 INNER COVER PCDU toner collection bottle ( Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) Inner right cover ( Section: Inner Cover) 4-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 192: Inner Right Cover

    Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) Inner right cover ( Section: Inner Right Cover) Remove the front right cover [A] with the operation panel [B] lifted up ( x 1). 4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER Right upper cover [A] ( x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-22...
  • Page 193 Exterior Covers 4.4.15 LEFT FRAME AND LEFT FRAME REAR COVER Left frame cover [A] ( x 1) Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2) 4.4.16 PAPER EXIT COVER Inverter tray [A] Paper exit cover [B] ( x 1) 4-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 194: Left Frame And Left Frame Rear Cover

    4.4.18 INNER TRAY Inner tray [A] ( x 2) 4.4.19 INNER REAR COVER Left frame cover ( Section: Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover) Paper exit cover ( Section: Paper Exit Cover) Inner tray ( Section: Inner Tray) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-24...

  • Page 195: Inner Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers Inner rear cover [A] ( x 1) 4-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 196 Scanner Unit 4.5 SCANNER UNIT 4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Open the ARDF or platen cover. Glass cover [A] ( x 4) Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-26...

  • Page 197: Scanner Unit

    Rear scale [A] ( x 3) Exposure glass [A] with left scale Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure glass. 4.5.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Exposure glass with left scale ( Section: Exposure Glass) 4-27 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 198: Original Length Sensors

    The three screws [B] do not need to be fully removed. Just loosen them to remove the SBU cover. Original length sensors [A] (hooks, x 1 each)) 4.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Operation panel ( Section: Operation Panel) Exposure glass ( Section: Exposure Glass) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-28...
  • Page 199 Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1) Disconnect the connector [A] from the lamp stabilizer [B]. Move the carriage unit [A] to the cutout position [B]. Cable guide [A] (hooks) Keep the cable guide for reassembling. Adjustor clamp [B] ( x 1) 4-29 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 200: Exposure Lamp

    11. Hold down the snap [B], and then slide the exposure lamp [C] to the front side. 12. Exposure lamp [A] Reassembling Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the adjustor clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack. 4.5.4 SCANNER MOTOR Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-30...

  • Page 201: Scanner Motor

    Make sure that the ground plate [B] is attached when installing the scanner motor in the scanner motor bracket. Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor ( Section: Image Adjustment). 4.5.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) Exposure glass ( Section: Exposure Glass) 4-31 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 202: Scanning

    Section: "Image Adjustment: Scanning". SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different. 4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-32...

  • Page 203: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    Scanner rear cover ( Section: Exposure Lamp) Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [B] clockwise. Remove the mylar [A]. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks). 4-33 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 204: Left Cover

    1) Platen cover sensor [B] ( x 1) 4.5.9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE Rear Cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Operation panel ( Section: Operation Panel) Exposure glass ( Section: Exposure Glass) Scanner left cover [A] ( x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-34...
  • Page 205 5) Take aside the connector bracket [A] ( x 2). Scanner rear frame [B] ( x 8, x all, x all) Scanner motor bracket ( Section: Scanner Motor) 10. Rear scanner drive pulley [A] ( x 1) 4-35 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 206: Front Scanner Wire

    When removing the rear scanner wire, remove the e-ring at the rear side of the shaft. Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with D037/D038/D040/D041 4-36...
  • Page 207 Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time. Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C] and the rear track of the movable pulley [D]. 4-37 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 208 [C] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage hole [E] and the right holes in the front rail [F]. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-38...

  • Page 209: Rear Scanner Wire

    Pass the left end (with the ball) [B] through the drive pulley notch. Pass the right end (with the ring) through the drive pulley hole. Wind the left end [B] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the right end counterclockwise three times. 4-39 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 210: Reinstalling The Front Scanner Wire

    Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must face the rear. Do steps 7 through 13 from the “Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire” ( Section: Front Scanner Wire). D037/D038/D040/D041 4-40...

  • Page 211: Laser Optics

    IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 648 - 663 nm and an output of 9 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury. 4.6.2 LASER UNIT Before installing a new laser unit, remove the polygon motor holder bracket and the tag from the new unit. 4-41 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 212: Preparing A New Laser Unit

    Install the three screws [C] (removed in step 2) in the laser unit. Reinstall the polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4). Before removing the old laser unit Do the following settings before removing the laser unit. These are adjustments for skew D037/D038/D040/D041 4-42...

  • Page 213: Recovery Procedure For No Replacement Preparation Of Laser Unit

    Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor. Do steps 1 to 7 of "Before removing the laser unit". Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the left cover. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 4-43 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 214: Removing The Laser Unit

    Removing the laser unit Left cover [A] ( x 10) ITB cleaning unit [A] ( x 2) Ventilation rear fan holder [A] ( x 2, x 1) Ventilation front fan holder [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-44...

  • Page 215: Color Registration

    SP2-101-001 to -004: Color Registration: Main Scan for each color SP2-101-013 to -016: Color Registration: Sub Scan for each color SP2-102-001, -003, -004, -006, -007, -009, -010, -012: Main Magnification for each color and line speed SP2-104-001 to -004: :LD Initial Power Adjustment for each color 4-45 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 216: Line Position Adjustment

    Exit the SP mode. 4.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR Laser unit ( Section: Laser Unit) Polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4) Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 1) Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-46...
  • Page 217 Then do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode a" (SP2-111-001). To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP2-194-010 to -012. 4-47 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 218: Image Creation

    PCDU [B] ( x 2 each) When installing a new PCDU Remove the cover [A] on the toner inlet and pull out the tape [B] from the new development unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-48...

  • Page 219: Drum Unit And Development Unit

    If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Turn the machine power off. PCDU ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) Front cover [A] ( x 2) 4-49 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 220 Image Creation Rear cover [A] ( x 2) Drum unit [A] and development unit [B] ( x 1) When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [A] with a vacuum cleaner. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-50...

  • Page 221: New Unit Detection For The Development Unit

    Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) Inner cover ( Section: Inner Cover) PCDU ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) Remove the corresponding color PCDU. For example, if you remove the toner hopper unit: K, remove the black PCDU. 4-51 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 222: Toner Hopper Unit: Y

    Toner hopper unit: Y Open the front door. PCDU toner collection bottle Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) Inner cover ( Section: Inner Cover) PCDU ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) Gear cover [A] ( x 2, x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-52...

  • Page 223: When Installing A New Toner Hopper Unit

    The color toner hopper units use a common developer bottle without any label. So, it should be easy to distinguish color carrier bottles from the black one. When cleaning a toner hopper unit, be careful not to vacuum the developer from the bottom of the hopper. 4-53 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 224: Inner Tray

    Take aside the toner supply gear unit [A] ( x 3). NOTE When removing the toner supply gear unit for Yellow, one of screws on the toner supply gear unit is difficult to see. 1) Remove the left cover ( Section: Left Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-54...

  • Page 225: Toner Collection Motor

    Toner supply motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2) 4.7.5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR Open the front door. PCDU toner collection bottle ( Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) PCDU: Yellow ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) 4-55 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 226 Image Creation Ventilation Fan: Front ( Ventilation Fan) Disconnect two harnesses [A]. Toner collection motor assembly [A] ( x 2, x 3) Gears [A] ( x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-56...

  • Page 227: Pcdu Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor

    PCDU toner collection bottle full sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks) 4.7.7 PCDU TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE SET SWITCH Toner collection motor assembly ( Section: Toner Collection Motor) PCDU toner collection bottle set switch [A] (hooks, x 1) 4-57 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 228: Rfid Board

    Image Creation 4.7.8 RFID BOARD All toner hopper units ( Section: Toner Hopper Unit) Inner tray ( Section: Inner Tray) Toner supply drive shafts [A] Harness cover [A] ( x 1) RFID board [A] ( x 3, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-58...

  • Page 229: Image Transfer

    ITB cleaning unit [A] ( x 2) When installing the ITB cleaning unit Secure the front side [B] first with a screw. This [B] is the positioning screw. 4.8.2 ITB TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE FULL SENSOR Left cover ( Section: Left Cover) 4-59 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 230: Itb (Image Transfer Belt) Unit

    Unlock the ITB lock lever ( Section: Inner Right Cover). Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Hinge bracket [A] ( x 1) Pull the lever [B] to open the paper transfer unit. Harness cover [C] ( x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-60...

  • Page 231: Itb Unit Motor

    Section: ITB Unit) ITB unit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT ITB cleaning unit ( Section: ITB Cleaning Unit) ITB unit ( Section: ITB Unit) ITB unit motor ( Section: ITB Unit Motor) 4-61 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 232 Image Transfer Two stays [A] ( x 2 each) Rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front) ( x 1: M3x10) Front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear) ( x 1: M3x10) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-62...
  • Page 233 Image Transfer Handle [A] ( x 2: M3x10) Guide bracket [A] Pull the tension roller [A] as shown. 4-63 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 234 12. Attach the handle, which was removed in step 6, to the projection [B] on the rear left side ( x 1). This handle will be used as a stand in later steps. 13. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-64...

  • Page 235: When Reinstalling A New Image Transfer Belt

    [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit. 4.8.6 ITB CONTACT MOTOR Pull out all the toner bottles. Inverter tray ( Section: Inverter Tray) Inner tray ( Section: Inner Tray) 4-65 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 236: Itb Contact Sensor

    Take aside the ITB contact motor unit [A] ( x 2) Disconnect two harnesses [A], and then remove the ITB contact motor unit ( x 1) ITB contact motor [A] ( x 2) 4.8.7 ITB CONTACT SENSOR ITB contact motor unit ( Section: ITB Contact Motor) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-66...
  • Page 237 Image Transfer ITB contact sensor [A] (hooks) 4-67 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 238: Paper Transfer

    If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Open the duplex unit. Open the paper transfer unit [A]. Remove the PTR unit [A], releasing the two locks [B]. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-68...

  • Page 239: Opening The Paper Transfer Unit

    4.9.2 OPENING THE PAPER TRANSFER UNIT Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Hinge bracket [A] ( x 1) Open the paper transfer unit [B]. 4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) 4-69 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 240: Cleaning For Id Sensors

    Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require cleaning maintenance every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning. PCDU: K ( Section: PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)) ITB unit ( Section: ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-70...

  • Page 241: After Installing A New Id Sensor Unit/Board

    Input all correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board. For example, input "0.98" with SP3-362-013. Exit the SP mode. 4.9.4 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR Right rear cover ( Section: Right Rear Cover) 4-71 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 242 Paper Transfer Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-72...

  • Page 243: Drive Unit

    There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing: Duplex inverter motor Duplex Exit Motor Duplex Entrance Motor By-pass Motor 4.10.1 GEAR UNIT Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Rear lower cover ( Section: Rear Lower Cover) 4-73 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 244: Adjustment After Reinstalling The Gear Unit

    8) The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the gear unit. Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit Do the following procedures after reinstalling the gear unit. Turn on the main power switch. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-74...

  • Page 245: Registration Motor

    Section: Controller Box) Registration motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T1 Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Rear lower cover ( Section: Right Lower Cover) Open the controller box ( Section: Controller Box) 4-75 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 246: Paper Feed Motor: T2

    The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the paper feed motor 4.10.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR: T2 Rear cover Section: Rear Cover) Rear lower cover ( Section:Rear Lower Cover) Paper feed motor: T2 [A] ( x 1, x 2) 4.10.5 DRUM MOTOR: CMY D037/D038/D040/D041 4-76...

  • Page 247: Development Motor: Cmy

    Section: Controller Box) Development motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4.10.7 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: K Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Rear lower cover ( Section: Rear Lower Cover) Open the controller box. ( Section: Controller Box) 4-77 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 248: Development Clutch: K

    Remove the development clutch: K [B] from the bracket. 4.10.9 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Rear lower cover ( Section: Rear Lower Cover) Open the controller box. ( Section: Controller Box) Drum/Development Motor: K ( Section: Drum/Development Motor: K) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-78...
  • Page 249 The hook [B] is installed as shown above. Do not pull the stay by force, or the hook might be broken. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the fusing/paper exit motor. 4-79 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 250 Drive Unit D037/D038/D040/D041 4-80...

  • Page 251: Fusing

    If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Turn off the main power switch. Open the duplex unit. 4-81 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 252: When Installing The Fusing Unit

    Section: Fusing Unit) Entrance Guide Plate [A] ( x 2) Cleaning Requirement The entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the entrance guide plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-82...

  • Page 253: Stripper Plate

    Fusing 4.11.4 STRIPPER PLATE Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4) Spring [A] and bearing [B] at front and rear side 4-83 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 254: Cleaning Requirement

    Release the springs [A] at the front and rear side. Stripper plate [B] Cleaning Requirement The stripper plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the stripper plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-84...

  • Page 255: Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure

    The exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Open the exit guide plate [A]. Clean the exit guide plate [A] with a cloth moistened with alcohol. 4.11.6 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) 4-85 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 256 Remove the cable [A] from the front stay ( x 1). The color of the pressure roller fusing lamp cord differs depending on the destination. Red: 220 - 240 V, Blue: 120 V Front pressure roller lamp stay [B] ( x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-86...

  • Page 257: Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

    4.11.7 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Remove the cords [A] from the front stay ( x 2) Remove the cords [A] from the rear stay ( x 2) Rear stay [B] ( x 2) 4-87 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 258: Fusing Belt

    Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing upper cover ( Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) Heating roller fusing lamp ( Section: Heating Roller Fusing Lamp) Idle gear [A] and fusing roller gear [B] D037/D038/D040/D041 4-88...
  • Page 259 Remove the front cord [A] of the pressure roller fusing lamp ( x 1). Front stay [B] ( x 2) Spring [A] and bearing [B] at front and rear side Top frame [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4-89 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 260 11. Take the thermostat base [A] aside ( x 2). This prevents the fusing belt from being torn or scratched when the fusing belt is removed from the fusing unit. 12. Bearings [A] of the heating roller (C-ring x 1 each) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-90...

  • Page 261: Heating, Fusing And Tension Roller

    If you install a new fusing roller, set SP 3902-015 to "1" before you start this procedure. If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Fusing belt with rollers ( Section: Fusing Belt) 4-91 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 262: When Reinstalling The Fusing Roller

    Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the area [B] at the rear side of the fusing roller. Do not apply lubricant to areas other than the areas [A] and [B] as shown above. 4.11.10 PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing belt with rollers ( Section: Fusing Belt) Pressure roller fusing lamp ( Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-92...
  • Page 263 Pressure levers [A] at the rear side (snap ring x 1, spring x 1) Top right frame [A] ( x 4) Pressure roller gear [A] and bearing [B] at the rear side (C-ring x 1) Bearing [C] (C-ring x 1) 4-93 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 264: Cleaning Requirement

    Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) Heating roller thermostats [A] ( x 3) Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this. 4.11.12 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR Fusing upper cover ( Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-94...

  • Page 265: Cleaning Requirement

    The heating roller thermistor requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the heating roller thermistor with a dry cloth. 4.11.13 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing upper cover ( Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) 4-95 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 266: Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center

    1) Pressure roller thermistor: Center [A] ( x 1) Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing upper cover ( Section: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp) Thermistor end assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-96...

  • Page 267: Cleaning Requirement

    4.11.14 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing belt with rollers ( Section: Fusing Belt) Pressure roller ( Section: Pressure Roller) Pressure roller thermostats [A] ( x 2) 4.11.15 THERMOPILE Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) 4-97 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 268: When Cleaning The Lens Of The Thermopile

    When cleaning the lens of the thermopile Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may get a serious burn. Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Clean the thermopile lens [A] with a dry cloth. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-98...

  • Page 269: Cleaning Unit (Option) Installation Procedure

    Fusing 4.11.16 CLEANING UNIT (OPTION) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4) Top right frame [A] ( x 4) Install the cleaning unit [A] in the fusing unit. 4-99 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 270 Fusing Secure the cleaning unit [A] ( x 2) Reassemble the fusing unit. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-100...

  • Page 271: Paper Feed

    Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it. If you do, clean the feed roller with a damp cloth or alcohol. 4.12.3 FRICTION PAD Paper tray 1 or 2 ( Section: Paper Tray) 4-101 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 272: When Reinstalling The Friction Pad

    Make sure that the mylar [A] does not go under the friction pad when reinstalling the friction pad. Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands, when replacing it. If you do, clean the feed roller with a damp cloth or alcohol. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-102...

  • Page 273: Paper Size Switch

    Paper tray 1 and 2 ( Section: Paper Tray) Paper size switch: T1 [A] Paper size switch: T2 [B] Paper size switch [A] (hooks, x 1) 4.12.5 PAPER END SENSOR Paper End Sensor: T1 Paper tray 1 and 2 ( Section: Paper Tray) 4-103 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 274: Paper End Sensor: T2

    Paper end sensor: T2 [B] (hooks, x 1) 4.12.6 REGISTRATION SENSOR Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Open the paper transfer unit to the fully-open position ( Section: PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit). Registration roller guide [A] ( x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-104...

  • Page 275: Cleaning The Registration Roller

    Paper Feed Close the paper transfer unit [A]. Relay guide plate [B] ( x 2) Upper vertical transport guide [C] ( x 1, x 2) Registration sensor [A] ( x 2, hooks, x 1) Cleaning the registration roller 4-105 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 276: Vertical Transport Sensor

    Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Open the paper transfer unit to the fully-open position ( Section: PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit). Middle guide plate [A] ( x 2) Open the lower right door [A]. Release the belt [B]. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-106...

  • Page 277: Vertical Transport Sensor 2

    1) Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Vertical transport sensor 1 [B] ( x 1, hooks) Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Open the lower right door [A]. Release the belt [B]. 4-107 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 278 Paper Feed Release the rear pivot [A], and then remove the lower right door [B]. Lower guide bracket [A] ( x 2) Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) Vertical transport sensor 2 [B] (hooks, x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-108...

  • Page 279: Paper Exit

    Fusing Unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Front right cover ( Section: Front Right Cover) Junction gate solenoid fan base ( Section: Junction Gate Solenoid Fan) Paper exit cover ( Section: Paper Exit Cover) Inner Tray ( Section: Inner Tray) 4-109 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 280: Fusing Exit

    Remove or disconnect the following: Two screws [A] at the front side Front harness [B] Ground cable [C] ( x 1) Rear harness [D] Paper exit unit [A] 4.13.3 FUSING EXIT Paper exit unit ( Section: Paper Exit Unit) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-110...

  • Page 281: Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Exit Sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1) Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1) 4.13.4 PAPER EXIT SENSOR Paper exit unit ( Section: Paper Exit Unit) Paper exit sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) 4-111 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 282: When Installing The Paper Exit Sensor

    Stand the paper exit unit so that [A] is facing up. Otherwise, the paper exit sensor feeler interrupts the installation of the paper exit sensor. Insert the hook [B] first. 4.13.5 INVERTER SENSOR Paper exit unit ( Section: Paper Exit Unit) Remove the screw [A]. Release all clamps that clamp the harness [B]. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-112...

  • Page 283: Inverter Motor

    Move the sensor assembly [A] to the cutout [B], and then remove it ( x 1) Inverter sensor [A] (hooks) 4.13.6 INVERTER MOTOR Paper exit unit ( Section: Paper Exit Unit) Inverter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4-113 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 284: Fusing Front Fan

    Section: Front Right Cover) Fusing front fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) When installing the fusing front fan Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-114...

  • Page 285: Duplex Unit

    Open the duplex unit. Remove the screw [A]. Move the duplex unit in the direction shown by , and remove the hook [A]. Disconnect the harness [B]. Release the front and rear arms [A], [B] ( x 1 each). 4-115 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 286: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    4.14.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Duplex inner cover [A] ( x 2) Duplex entrance guide unit [A] (hook x 3) Lift up the duplex guide plate [A] first when reinstalling the duplex entrance D037/D038/D040/D041 4-116...

  • Page 287: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit guide unit. Duplex outer guide plate [A] ( x 4) Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hook) 4.14.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR Pull out the 1st tray. Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) 4-117 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 288: Duplex Entrance Motor

    Duplex exit sensor assembly [B] ( x 1, ground screw x 1, x 1, x 1) Duplex exit sensor [A] (hook) 4.14.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Duplex inner cover ( Section: Duplex Entrance Sensor) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-118...

  • Page 289: Duplex Exit Motor

    Separate the duplex entrance motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2) 4.14.5 DUPLEX EXIT MOTOR Duplex unit ( Section: Duplex Unit) Duplex inner cover ( Section: Duplex Entrance Sensor) Duplex exit motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1) 4-119 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 290: By-Pass Motor

    Duplex inner cover ( Section: Duplex Entrance Sensor) By-pass motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1) Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket to disconnect the harness. By-pass motor [A] ( x 2) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-120...

  • Page 291: By-Pass Tray Unit

    Open the by-pass tray unit [A] By-pass tray unit ( x 2, hook [B]). Use a flat-head screw driver or similar tool to push the hook [B] down. 4.14.8 BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR Open the by-pass tray unit. 4-121 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 292: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    Duplex Unit By-pass tray right cover [A] ( x 2) By-pass paper length sensor [A] ( x 1) 4.14.9 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR By-pass tray unit ( Section: By-Pass Tray Unit) By-pass tray cover [A] (hook x 1) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-122...

  • Page 293: When Reinstalling The By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    Check). - Display on the LCD - Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A3 SEF 00001001 A5 SEF 00001110 B4 SEF 00001011 B6 SEF 00001100 A4 SEF 00000011 A6 SEF 00001101 B5 SEF 00000111 Smaller A6 SEF 00001101 4-123 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 294: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    Reinstall the right hook first and then the left hook using a flat-head screw driver or similar tool. 4.14.11 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER By-pass tray unit ( Section: By-Pass Tray Unit) By-pass feed roller [A] (hook) 4.14.12 BY-PASS TRAY HP SENSOR Open the by-pass tray unit. Open the duplex unit. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-124...
  • Page 295 Duplex Unit Remove the hand holder [A]. Rotate the actuator [A] counter clockwise as shown above. By-pass tray HP sensor [B] (hook). 4-125 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 296: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.15.1 BOARDS Controller Box Closed i-Controller Board (D038/D041) [B1] i-Controller Board (D037/D040) HDD (D038/D041 only) Controller Box Open D037/D038/D040/D041 4-126...

  • Page 297: Controller Box Cover

    Section: Rear Cover) Scanner cable bracket [A] ( x 4) Loosen the eight screws. Slide up the controller box cover [B], and then remove it. 4.15.3 CONTROLLER BOX Opening the controller box Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) 4-127 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 298 Open the controller box [A]. 4.15.4 BCU ⇒ Do not replace the BCU and CTL boards together. If required, See NOTE 1 after NVRAM Replacement section ( 4.15.12). Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Controller box cover ( Section: Controller Box Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-128...

  • Page 299: When Installing The New Bcu

    NVRAM. Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data. 4.15.5 HDD (ONLY FOR D038/D041) Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Controller box cover ( Section: Controller Box Cover) 4-129 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 300: Controller Box Fan

    2 from the controller board). HDD [A] ( x 4, x 2). Reconnect the harnesses to the controller board. 4.15.6 CONTROLLER BOX FAN Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Controller box cover ( Section: Controller Box Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-130...

  • Page 301: When Installing The Controller Box Fan

    Make sure that the controller box fan is installed with its decal facing upward. 4.15.7 FUSING REAR FAN Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Fusing rear fan with the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 4-131 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 302: When Installing The Fusing Rear Fan

    DRB with the bracket [A] ( x 4, x all, x all) Power cord [A] (Blue: ground screw x 1, x 2) Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket. PSU board [C] ( x 9, x All, x All) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-132...

  • Page 303: Hvps: Tts Board

    1, x 1) HVPS: TTS board [B] ( x 5, x all) 4.15.10 HVPS: CB BOARD Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Open the controller box ( Section: Controller Box) HVPS: CB board [A] ( x 6, All 4-133 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 304: I-Controller Board

    NVRAM Replacement section ( 4.15.12). Rear cover ( Section: Rear Cover) Open the controller box ( Section: Controller Box) Controller box left bracket [A] ( x 5) For D037/D040 i-controller board [A] ( x 9,  x all) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-134...
  • Page 305 Electrical Components Remove the Interface rails [A], NVRAM [B] and RAM-DIMM [C]. For D038/D041 HDD ( Section: HDD (Only for D038/D041)) i-controller board [A] ( x 8, x all) 4-135 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 306: When Installing The New Controller Board

    Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board. When installing a new HDD unit Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted. Install the stamp data using "SP5853". Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-136...

  • Page 307: Disposal Of Hdd Units

    Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on. SC995-01 occurs. 10. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have 4-137 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 308: Nvram On The Controller

    Do not replace the BCU and CTL boards together. If required follow the procedure listed here. Case 1: Replace BCU board and NVRAM first if it is possible to program SP mode. Replace the BCU board and NVRAM. Turn the main power ON. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-138...
  • Page 309 10. Enter the SP mode settings that ware set in the factory line. It is impossible to use the NVRAM on the CTL board to any other machine. So, you should replace the NVRAM on the CTL board to solve the SC195. 4-139 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 310: Machine Boot-Up

    4.16 MACHINE BOOT-UP This machine boots up the modules in the following order. Module Name System application Copy application Printer application Web System application Scanner application Fax application It takes approximately 90 seconds to boot up all modules. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-140...

  • Page 311: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE SECTION 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 10 ~ 12 05/07/2009 Firmware Update 26 ~ 27 05/21/2009 NVRAM 12/22/2009 NVRAM...

  • Page 313: System Maintenance Reference

    Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 314: Sp Mode Button Summary

    Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page). Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line). Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 315: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    The number you enter writes over the previous setting. Press to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of range.) Press “Yes” when you are prompted to complete the selection. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 316: Service Mode Lock/Unlock

    Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the machine. The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON. 5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES (D037/D040) System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions...

  • Page 317: Selecting Programs

    You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated. Quitting Programs/Ending SP Mode Press the key or the "Cancel" key to quit the program. You can end the SP mode by pressing one of these keys several times. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 318: Remarks

    L: Low speed (60 mm/s) D: Duplex M: Middle speed (120 mm/s) Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 319 SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers. SSP: This denotes a “Special Service Program” mode setting. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 320: Firmware Update

    Panel control Operation Panel OpePanel. Fax FCU Fax control GWFCU-4(ww)-1-1 Flash ROM on the Remote Fax Fax control Remote Fax controller board Language firmware Language 1 Two languages can be Language Operation Panel selected from 16 Language 2 languages. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 321: L-Model (D037/D040)

    PictBridge PictBridge control PictBridge SD card PctBrgd ARDF ARDF control ARDF Finisher (D429) Finisher control Finisher (D429) Finisher L-Model (D037/D040) Location of Type of firmware Function Message shown firmware Engine Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine System/Copy Flash ROM on the...

  • Page 322: Before You Begin

    SD card to the machine. To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation D037/D038/D040/D041 5-10...

  • Page 323: Updating Firmware

    If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “D037” folder onto the card. If the card already contains folders up to “D037”, copy the necessary firmware files (e.g.

  • Page 324: Error Messages

    “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( Section: Handling Firmware Update Error) Firmware Update Error If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-12...

  • Page 325: Recovery After Power Loss

    The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals when the update is finished. 11. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switch the copier on. 5-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 326: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is Incorrect SD card version corrupted. Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install card) again. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-14...
  • Page 327 Controller module download SD card and tray again, or replace controller failed board. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD Electronic confirmation check card is for another machine. Acquire correct failed update data then install again. 5-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 328: Installing Another Language

    Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to Exit(0) quit the update procedure and return to normal screen. Touch "LANG 1(1)" to select the 1st Language. Touch "LANG (2)" to select the 2nd Language. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-16...
  • Page 329 The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as the 1st language. 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. 5-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 330 11. After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD, switch the copier main power switch off. Then remove the SD card from the slot. 12. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-18...

  • Page 331: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset. Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults. Press User Tools/Counter Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings. You must press first. 5-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 332 Reboot/System Setting Reset Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-20...

  • Page 333: Controller Self-Diagnostics

    Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power has been turned on. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation. The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics. 5-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 334: Sd Card Appli Move

    The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to another card. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-22...

  • Page 335: Move Exec

    Move Exec (SP5-873-001). Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs 5-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 336 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2. This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-24...

  • Page 337: Downloading Stamp Data

    Select SP5853 and then press “EXECUTE”. The following screen opens while the stamp data is downloading. The download is finished when the message prompts you to close. Press the “Exit” button. Then turn the copier off and on again. 5-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 338: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    Engine SP data backup when performing a NVRAM data upload (SP5824) is possible with the following firmware installed. • D037: With System/Copy firmware version 1.15 (or later) installed. • D038/D041: With System/Copy firmware version 1.03 (or later) installed. Therefore, whenever you perform an NVRAM Upload/Download, make sure to print out the SP Data List before you perform SP5801-001 (Memory Clear: All Clear) or SP5801-002 (Memory Clear: Engine).

  • Page 339: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram

    The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not match. This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM: Total Count C/O, P/O Count 5-27 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 340: Address Book Upload/Download

    11. Install the SD slot cover. If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message is displayed. Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your location. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-28...

  • Page 341: Upload

    The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading. The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded. If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is displayed. 5-29 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 342: Using The Debug Log

    On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press . This switches the Save Debug Log feature on. The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-30...
  • Page 343 Saves data for jams. More than one event can be selected. Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4 Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example shows “Engine SC Error” selected. 5-31 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 344 Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered. The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) D037/D038/D040/D041 5-32...
  • Page 345 Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning Engine Control Service Net File Application GW Print Service Printer Design Language GW Print Service – Print GSP-PM Print Server Module Image Memory Handler System Control Service System Resource Memory Control Service Management 5-33 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 346: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
  • Page 347 Switch the machine off and on to resume operation. The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card. 5-35 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 348: Card Save Function

    Readbacks will not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail. 5.11.2 PROCEDURE For D038/D041 Turn the main power switch OFF. Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON. Enter SP mode. Select the “Printer Sp”. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch”. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-36...
  • Page 349 Card Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print” menu. Press “Exit” to exit SP Mode. Press the “User Tools/Counter” button. Select “Printer Features”. 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New). 5-37 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 350 11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu. 12. Press the “Printer” button. 13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel. 14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below. D037/D038/D040/D041 5-38...

  • Page 351: For D037/D040

    17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the numeric keypad to register the changes. 18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off. For D037/D040 Turn the main power switch OFF. 5-39...
  • Page 352 10. Use the arrow key and select “Printer Features”. 11. Use the arrow key and select “List/Test Print”. 12. Use the arrow key and select “Cardsave (ADD) or Cardsave (New). 13. To enable the newly configured settings, select “switch” button and then press the D037/D038/D040/D041 5-40...

  • Page 353: Error Messages

    No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job. Write error: Failed to write to the card. Other error: An unknown error occurred. If an error occurs, pressing “OK” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state. 5-41 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 355 TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 357: Troubleshooting

    Service Call Conditions 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For "SC Table" information, see "Appendices". D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 358: Process Control Error Conditions

    Process Control Error Conditions 6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: Developer Initialization Result Process Control Self-Check Result Line Position Adjustment Result D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 359: Troubleshooting Guide

    For example, if "-0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error occurs, input "-0.8" or more with SP1-803-001 to 003. If an error still remains, refer to "Motor Speed Adjustment". Execute the line position adjustment (rough) with SP2-111-003. Execute the line position adjustment (fine) with SP2-111-001. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 360: Motor Speed Adjustment

    Fusing Mot:120 (-0.4 default) SP1-801-009 Transfer Mot:120 (0 default) SP1-801-012 Feed1:CW120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-014 Feed1:CCW120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-016 Feed2:CW120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-018 Feed2:CCW120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-020 By-pass:120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-022 Inverter:CW120 (0 default) SP1-801-024 Inverter:CCW120 (0 default) SP1-801-026 Duplex Entrance:120 (0.3 default) D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 361 + input value) is within the adjustable range for each motor described below. SP No. Max. Min. Title SP1-801-025 Duplex Entrance:60 SP1-801-027 Duplex Exit:60 SP1-801-033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi SP1-801-034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi SP1-801-035 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi SP1-801-036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi SP1-801-037 Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi SP1-801-038 By-pass:60:1200dpi SP1-801-039 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi SP1-801-040 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi SP1-801-041 FusingMot:60:1200dpi SP1-801-042 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi SP1-801-043 TransferMot:60:1200dpi D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 362: Trapezoid Image Adjustment

    SP1-801-008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick SP1-801-010 TransferMot:60:Thick SP1-801-011 Feed1:CW60:Thick SP1-801-013 Feed1:CCW60:Thick SP1-801-015 Feed2:CW60:Thick SP1-801-017 Feed2:CCW60:Thick SP1-801-019 By-pass:60:Thick SP1-801-021 Inverter:CW60:Thick SP1-801-023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick 6.3.2 TRAPEZOID IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Before Adjusting the Trapezoid Image Enter SP2-109 and print out the test pattern 14 (Trimming Area). D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 363: Adjusting The Trapezoid Image

    Remove the following items: Fusing unit ( Section: Fusing Unit) Front right cover ( Section: Front Right Cover) PCDU toner collection bottle ( Section: PCDU Toner Collection Bottle) Inner cover ( Section: Inner Cover) Inner right cover ( Section: Inner Right Cover) D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 364 Loosen the four screws [A] on the front fusing guide. Remove the screw [B] on the adjustor lever. This screw is not necessary after tightening the front fusing guide. If the horizontal lines slope down to the left [A], move the front fusing guide upward. To D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 365 One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm. Retighten the four screws for the front fusing guide. Print out the test pattern and check the image quality. If the symptom still occurs, repeat the above steps. D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 366: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection 6.4 JAM DETECTION See "Appendices" for the following information: Paper Jam Display Jam Codes and Display Codes (Paper Size Code) (Sensor Locations) D037/D038/D040/D041 6-10...

  • Page 367: Electrical Component Defects

    Electrical Component Defects 6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS See "Appendices" for the following information: Sensors Blown Fuse Conditions (Power Supply Unit) 6-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 368: Scanner Test Mode

    When the i-controller board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged. Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins. Condensation Destruction of circuit elements Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit. D037/D038/D040/D041 6-12...
  • Page 369 The scanner and i-controller are incorrectly connected. When you have completed a check, turn the main switch off and on before you do another check. When you have completed all necessary checks, turn the main switch off and on.Error! No index entries found. 6-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 371 D037/D038/D040/D041 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...
  • Page 373 D037/D038/D040/D041 APPENDICES TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS 1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS ........... 1-1 1.1 COPIER ..................... 1-1 1.2 PRINTER ....................1-5 1.3 SCANNER ....................1-7 1.4 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ..............1-8 1.4.1 PAPER FEED ................... 1-8 North America ..................1-8 Europe/ Asia..................1-10 1.4.2 PAPER EXIT...................
  • Page 374 4.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1..........4-13 4.1.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 2..........4-18 4.1.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING ..........4-21 4.1.7 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION ..........4-34 4.1.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS ..............4-42 4.1.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM ............4-48 D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 375 7. APPENDIX: JAM DETECTION............ 7-1 7.1 JAM DETECTION ..................7-1 7.1.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ..............7-1 Paper Size Code .................. 7-1 7.1.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES..........7-2 Mainframe .................... 7-2 ARDF (Original Jam) ................7-5 Sensor Locations.................. 7-7 SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 376 Table 3: APS Original Size Detection..........9-344 Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4)..........9-345 Table 5: Area Display ............... 9-346 9.1.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ............. 9-346 Copier....................9-346 Internal Finisher (D429)..............9-352 ARDF (D366)..................9-353 9.1.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............9-354 D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 377 9.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE..............9-356 9.2.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ............9-356 9.3 SCANNER SP MODE ................9-363 9.3.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) ..........9-363 9.3.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)........9-364 SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 379: Appendix: Specifications

    APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 381: Copier

    Maximum original size: A3/11" x 17" ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF Thin (60 g/m or less) D037/D038: 20 cpm (color/black & white) D040/D041: 25 cpm (color/black & white) Plain 1 (74 g/m or less)/ 2 (90 g/m or less) D037/D038: 20 cpm (color/black &...
  • Page 382 Copier D040/D041: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white) OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi) D037/D038: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white) D040/D041: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white) First copy (normal Color: 9.5 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) mode): Black & white: 6.5 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) Warm-up time: Less than 30 seconds (20°C)
  • Page 383 220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: 8A or more (for Europe/ASIA) 120V 220 - 240V Power Consumption: Maximum 1440 W or less 1680 W or less Energy Saver H: 7.8 W or less H: 6.4 W or less SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 384 L: 6.0 W or less (*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT. The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology. Dimensions (W x D x H): Copier: 587 x 655 x 725 mm (23.1" x 25.8" x 28.5") Copier (L) + PFU + Right tray: 854 x 655 x 1117 mm (33.6"...

  • Page 385: Printer

    *1,800 x 600 dpi = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits) PS3: 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits) 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi D037/D038: 20 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode 12.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type) Printing speed:...
  • Page 386 Printer Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional only for H Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching) 60 GB (standard only for H) D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 387: Scanner

    FC: 41 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression: Standard) Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T/1000 Base-T for TCP/IP), Interface: Wireless LAN, USB2.0/SD Slot Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR) Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 388: Supported Paper Sizes

    182 x 257mm B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B6 SEF 128 x 182mm Ledger 11" x 17" Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Government 8.25" x 14" Legal SEF D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 389 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162mm C5 Env. 162 x 229mm DL Env. 110 x 220mm Remarks: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 390: Europe/ Asia

    257 x 364mm B5 SEF 182 x 257mm B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B6 SEF 128 x 182mm Ledger 11" x 17" Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" D037/D038/D040/D041 1-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 391 16K SEF 195 x 267mm 16K LEF 267 x 195mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162mm C5 Env. 162 x 229mm DL Env. 110 x 220mm Remarks: SM Appendix 1-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 392: Paper Exit

    105 x 148 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Ledger 11" x 17" Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" D037/D038/D040/D041 1-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 393 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Remarks: SM Appendix 1-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 394: Internal Finisher

    B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Ledger 11" x 17" Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" D037/D038/D040/D041 1-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 395 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Remarks: SM Appendix 1-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 396: Platen/Ardf Original Size Detection

    A5 (148 x 210) L A5 (210 x 148) S B6 (128 x 182) L B6 (182 x 128) S 11" x 17" (DLT) 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (LG) 8.5" x 13" (F4) D037/D038/D040/D041 1-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 397 *2: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1. *3: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP4-305-1. *4: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP5-126-1. SM Appendix 1-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 398: Software Accessories

    The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.1 or later versions. 1.5.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS MacOS8.6 to 9.x, Printer Windows Windows Windows 2000, XP, MacOSX10.1 Language 95/98/ME NT4.0 Server 2003/Vista or later D037/D038/D040/D041 1-18 SM Appendix...

  • Page 399: Utility Software

    A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or Printer Utility for Mac TCP This software provides several convenient (Mac) functions for printing from Macintosh clients. This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM DeskTopBinder Lite DeskTopBinder Lite itself can be used as personal SM Appendix 1-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 400 Software Accessories (Win9x/ME, 2000/XP/2003, NT4) document management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saved in each client’s PC. This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM D037/D038/D040/D041 1-20 SM Appendix...

  • Page 401: Optional Equipment

    550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm (21.7" x 19.3" x 4.7") Weight: 10 kg (22 lb.) 1.6.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D425) Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end) SM Appendix 1-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 402: Paper Feed Unit (D331)

    220 – 240 Vac (230 V version) from the copier/printer when the optional tray heater is installed Power Consumption: 35 W (Copying/printing) Weight: 25 kg (55 lb) Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm D037/D038/D040/D041 1-22 SM Appendix...

  • Page 403: Internal Finisher & Punch Unit (D429)

    250 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or more Single size: Staple capacity: 50 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller 30 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger 3 positions Staple position: 1-staple: 2 positions (Top Left, Top Right) 2-staples: 1 positions SM Appendix 1-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 404: Shift Tray (D428)

    A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m , 16 to 28 lb. Tray Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb., A4) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) D037/D038/D040/D041 1-24 SM Appendix...

  • Page 405: Side Tray (D427)

    50 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb., A4) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: Less than 40 W Weight: 1.5 kg Size (W x D x H): 480 x 480 x 170mm (19.2”x19.2”x6.8”) SM Appendix 1-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 407: Appendix: Overview

    APPENDIX: OVERVIEW APPENDIX 2 OVERVIEW REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 409: Mechanical Component Layout

    16. Vertical transport roller 2 2. 1st carriage 17. Feed roller: T1 3. Original length sensor 18. Vertical transport roller 3 4. Lens 19. Tray 2 5. SBU 20. Tray 1 6. Inverter roller 21. Laser unit SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 410: Paper Path

    13. Vertical transport roller 1 28. Inner Tray 14. By-pass feed roller 15. Feed roller: T1 2.1.2 PAPER PATH With options 1. DF path 6. By-pass tray path 2. Exit path: Straight feed out 7. Vertical transport path: Tray 2 D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 411: Without Options

    10. Inverter path (option) 11. Exit path: Staple/ Shift Without options 1. DF path 5. By-pass tray path 2. Inverter path 6. Vertical transport path: Tray 2 3. Duplex path 7. Exit path 4. Vertical transport path: T1 SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 412: Drive Layout

    5. Drum motor: CMY 14. PTR contact motor 6. Development motor: CMY 15. ITB unit motor 7. Development clutch: K 16. Duplex entrance motor 8. Drum/Development motor: K 17. Fusing/Paper exit motor 9. Paper feed motor: T2 18. Inverter motor D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 413 APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 415: Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    Optics cloth Front and Rear Rails Dry cloth Exposure Glass Dry cloth; alcohol ADF Exposure Glass Dry cloth; alcohol APS Sensor Dry cloth PCDU Drum Unit-K, C, M, Y PCDU Toner Collection Bottle ITB and PTR unit SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 416 Others Dust Filter Item 120K 240K Remarks Paper Feed Feed Roller: Tray 1/2 Damp cloth Friction Pad: Tray 1/2 Dry cloth Damp cloth Registration Roller Never use alcohol. Registration Sensor Dry cloth Vertical Transport Roller Damp cloth D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 417: Ardf (D366)

    *1: The registration roller requires a cleaning maintenance every 60 K (total count). ARDF (D366) Item 120K Remarks Sensors Blower brush Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if Platen Sheet Cover required.) White Plate Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear Grease G501 Transport Roller Damp cloth; alcohol SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 418: One-Tray Paper Feed Unit (D425)

    Paper Feed Roller Dry cloth Friction Pad Dry cloth Paper Feed Guides Dry cloth Relay Rollers Dry cloth Bottom Plate Pad Dry cloth Relay Clutch Replace if necessary Paper Feed Clutch Replace if necessary 1 Bin Tray (D426) D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 419: Shift Tray (D427)

    (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). ARDF Item 120K 240K Remarks Pick-up Roller Number of originals Feed Belt Number of originals Separation Roller Number of originals SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 421 APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS APPENDIX 4 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 38 ~ 42 04/29/2011 Updated SC681. Revised pages 38 thru 42 54 ~ 55 09/03/2010 Added SC838 – Self Diagnostic Error: Clock Generator 67 ~ 71 01/09/2009 SC925 02/04/2009...

  • Page 423: Appendix: Service Call Conditions

    You can reset the machine by turning the Turn the operation switch or main operation switch or main switch power switch off and on. off and on. If the error occurs again, the same SC code is displayed. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 424: Sc Code Classification

    Unique for a specific model 300 - Charge 330 - Drum potential Image development 1 350 - Development 380 - Unique for a specific model Image development 2 400 - Image transfer 420 - Paper separation 430 - Cleaning D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 425 Network 670 - Internal data processing 680 - Unique for a specific model 700 - Original handling Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher 740 - Booklet finisher Controller 800 - Error after ready condition 820 - Diagnostics error SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 426: Sc1Xx: Scanning

    Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens. Check and clean the shading plate. Replace the exposure lamp. Replace the lamp stabilizer. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or scanner lens. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 427 Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between BCU and HP sensor disconnected Check the cable connection between the BCU board and scanner motor. Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor. Replace the scanner motor. Replace the HP sensor. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 428 Replace the exposure lamp. Replace the scanner motor. Replace the SBU board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SBU communication error The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 429 "ON" with the initial setting. A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set "ON" with the initial setting. Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 430: Sc 2Xx: Exposure

    Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the laser unit. Replace the harness. Replace the BCU. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 431 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD0 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [Y], is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 432 The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for end position [K]. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 433 FGATE ON error: M The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [M]. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. SM Appendix 4-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 434 The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) LD error: K LD error: Y The BCU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit D037/D038/D040/D041 4-12 SM Appendix...

  • Page 435: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 1

    Replace the image transfer belt unit. Replace the PCDU(s). Replace the laser unit. 4.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) AC charge output error [K] AC charge output error [M] AC charge output error [C] SM Appendix 4-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 436 Replace the development motor: CMY if the load torque is normal. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y D037/D038/D040/D041 4-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 437 TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective TD sensor defective Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and development unit for damage. SM Appendix 4-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 438 Drum gear position sensor error: M, C, Y The machine does not detect the drum position signal for 2.4 seconds at the drum phase adjustment. Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor Replace the drum gear position sensor. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 439 Overload on the drum motor: CMY Defective drum motor: CMY Defective harness Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU Defective interlock system Check or replace the harness. Replace the drum motor: CMY. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU. SM Appendix 4-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 440: Sc4Xx: Image Processing - 2

    Motor overload Defective ITB unit motor Replace the ITB unit. Replace the BCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ITB contact motor error The ITB contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at D037/D038/D040/D041 4-18 SM Appendix...
  • Page 441 Paper transfer unit contact error The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor Defective paper transfer unit contact motor SM Appendix 4-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 442 An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the separation, image transfer bet or paper transfer roller. High voltage leak Broken harness Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit Defective HVPS-TTS board D037/D038/D040/D041 4-20 SM Appendix...

  • Page 443: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive and caused an overload. Paper lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged Paper lift sensor defective Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged Tray lift motor defective SM Appendix 4-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 444 Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass motor Defective by-pass motor Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass tray HP sensor Defective by-pass tray HP sensor Check or replace the harness. Replace the by-pass motor. Replace the by-pass tray HP sensor. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 445 The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. Defective laser unit fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective drive board Defective BCU Check or replace the harness. Replace the laser unit fan. Replace the DRB. Replace the BCU. SM Appendix 4-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 446 Defective fusing rear fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective DRB Defective BCU Check or replace the harness. Replace the fusing rear fan. Replace the DRB. Replace the BCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Controller box fan error D037/D038/D040/D041 4-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 447 Replace the Junction gate solenoid fan. Replace the DRB. Replace the BCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing/Paper exit motor error The BCU receives the lock signal 2.0 seconds after turning on the fusing/paper exit motor. SM Appendix 4-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 448 The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 30 seconds after the edge temperature of the heating roller has reached the ready temperature. Dirty or defective thermopile Defective heating roller lamp D037/D038/D040/D041 4-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 449 Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature reaches 250 °C. Defective PSU Defective BCU Defective fusing control system Related SC code: SC 543 Replace the PSU. Replace the BCU. SM Appendix 4-27 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 450 45. Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply Check the power supply source. Replace the PSU Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermistor (end) error 2 D037/D038/D040/D041 4-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 451 Dirty or defective thermistor (end) Heating roller fusing lamp broken Related SC code: SC 542 Check if the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp. SM Appendix 4-29 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 452 Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure roller-fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 130 seconds or more. Broken heating roller fusing lamp Related SC code: SC 545 D037/D038/D040/D041 4-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 453 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermister error 3 The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach 0 °C for 45 seconds. Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor Defective pressure roller thermistor SM Appendix 4-31 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 454 The pressure roller thermistor (center) detects 250°C or more. Defective PSU Defective BCU Defective fusing control system Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center). Replace the PSU. Replace the BCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 3 D037/D038/D040/D041 4-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 455 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat 4 (software error) The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1 second. Defective PSU Defective BCU Replace the pressure roller thermistor (end). Replace the PSU. Replace the BCU. SM Appendix 4-33 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 456: Sc6Xx: Device Communication

    "1". Disconnected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter Check or replace the mechanical counter. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ARDF communication error After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 457 Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected. Replace the PSU if no power is supplied to peripherals. Replace the main board of peripherals. Replace the BCU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 1 SM Appendix 4-35 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 458 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device. Counter device control board defective Backup battery of counter device defective Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4 A backup battery error was returned by the counter device. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-36 SM Appendix...
  • Page 459 Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) BCU control data transfer abnormal A sampling of the control data sent from the BCU reveals an abnormality. Controller board defective SM Appendix 4-37 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 460 Consult with the user's local telephone company. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect dial up connection -001: Program parameter error -002: Program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem (RCG-M) tries to call the D037/D038/D040/D041 4-38 SM Appendix...
  • Page 461 Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the controller and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with controller is interrupted after a normal startup. Controller stall Controller board installed incorrectly SM Appendix 4-39 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 462 071 ~ 074 Electrical noise Replace the toner cartridge for the affected color (See table below). Replace the RFID controller board. RFID: Communication error due to the following: 081 ~ 164 Defective RFID reader and writer Electrical noise D037/D038/D040/D041 4-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 463 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) RFID: Unit check error The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges have not been installed in the machine. Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on. SM Appendix 4-41 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 464: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Defective shift tray motor Defective shift tray HP sensor. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 465 Defective stapler unit HP sensor Defective stapler movement motor Check the connection of the stapler movement motor. Check the connection of the stapler unit HP sensor. Replace the stapler unit HP sensor. Replace the stapler unit movement motor. SM Appendix 4-43 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 466 The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective D037/D038/D040/D041 4-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 467 Paper size sensor error with side tray (D038/D041) The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper size sensors. Defective connector Defective paper size sensors Defective DA or AD converter. Replace the punch slider unit. Replace the punch unit. SM Appendix 4-45 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 468 Motor overload Defective rear jogger fence HP sensor Replace the rear jogger fence HP sensor. Replace the rear jogger motor. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pick-up roller contact motor error without side tray (D038/D041) D037/D038/D040/D041 4-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 469 Replace the belt roller position sensor. Replace the belt roller solenoid. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) NVRAM data error Defective NVRAM on the main board of the internal finisher Check the harness connection. Replace the main board. SM Appendix 4-47 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 470: Sc8Xx: Overall System

    Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Energy saving I/O sub-system error The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error. Controller board defective Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Monitor Error D037/D038/D040/D041 4-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 471 47 types of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of [0801] to [4005] the error. The CPU detects an error and displays the specific error code with the program address where the error occurs. System firmware problem Defective controller SM Appendix 4-49 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 472 The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC. [0B00] Defective ASIC device Replace the controller. [0B06] ASIC detection error The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected. Defective ASIC Defective North Bridge and PCI I/F D037/D038/D040/D041 4-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 473 [50A2] Defective I/F between the video bridge device and i-controller Replace the i-controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error code [3003] Timeout error SM Appendix 4-51 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 474 An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [1401] Self-diagnosis error: Standard NVRAM The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the NVRAM is defective. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-52 SM Appendix...
  • Page 475 Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code [0201] Verification error Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM). Loose connection SM Appendix 4-53 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 476 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code Verification error (Slot 1) [0401] The data stored in the optional RAM in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading. Not specified RAM DIMM installed Defective RAM DIMM D037/D038/D040/D041 4-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 477 Defective CPU port for the I2C clock generator via the I2C bus. Replace Controller Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) USB NAND Flash ROM error The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read. [9101] Defective controller board SM Appendix 4-55 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 478 LAN board is detected. Loose connection Check the connection. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is established, but the wireless LAN board is detected. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-56 SM Appendix...
  • Page 479 HDD Encryption unit error 1 A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. Encryption key acquisition error: The controller fails to get a new encryption key. SM Appendix 4-57 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 480 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 2 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. HDD check error: The HDD is not correctly installed. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 481 HDD not initialized Defective HDD Reformat the HDD. Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD. SM Appendix 4-59 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 482 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly. Defective HDD Defective controller Replace the HDD. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error D037/D038/D040/D041 4-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 483 Store correct data in the SD card. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot. Install the SD card. Turn the main switch off and on. SM Appendix 4-61 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 484 Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail data error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization. Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Turn the main switch off and on. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-62 SM Appendix...
  • Page 485 An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362). The logical format for the HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again SM Appendix 4-63 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 486 Log Data Error 5 Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine -005 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. -099 Log Data Error 99 Other than the above causes D037/D038/D040/D041 4-64 SM Appendix...
  • Page 487 Defective flash ROM on the controller board Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) File format converter error The file format converter does not respond. Defective file format converter Replace the file format converter. SM Appendix 4-65 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 488: Sc9Xx: Miscellaneous

    Printer font error A necessary font is not found in the SD card. A necessary font is not found in the SD card. The SD card data is corrupted. Check that the SD card has the correct data. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-66 SM Appendix...
  • Page 489 Specified partition does not exist (-13) Device file does not exist Recovery from SC 925: Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865. SM Appendix 4-67 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 490 Cycle the machine off/on. ・SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Consult with the customer before you do this SP code. Procedure 4 If “Procedure 3” does not solve the problem, replace the HDD. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-68 SM Appendix...
  • Page 491 Internal parameter incorrect, insufficient working memory. This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Undefined error Defective software program An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred SM Appendix 4-69 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 492 An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated Check the devices necessary for the application program. If necessary devices have not been installed, install them. Check that application programs are correctly configured. D037/D038/D040/D041 4-70 SM Appendix...
  • Page 493 SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004) Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.) Image file which causes the problem, if possible SM Appendix 4-71 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 495 APPENDIX: PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS APPENDIX 5 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 497: Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions

    Vcnt is Vt target Vt target settings are not correct. ±0.2V. Toner density error Vt is more than 0.7V Make sure that the heat seal on the Vcnt error 2 when Vcnt is 4.3V and development unit is not removed. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 498: Process Control Self-Check Result

    Vt maximum error and an image is faint: Vt maximum or Replace the toner hopper unit. Vt error minimum error is Vt maximum error and an image is O.K: detected. Replace the development unit. Replace the BCU board. Vt minimum error: D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 499 Vk error: Vk is out of range. Hardware defective. Maximum 150 < Vk Same as 53 ID sensor pattern density is too high. Vk error: Vk is out of range. Background dirty Minimum Vk < –150 Hardware defective SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 500: Vsg Adjustment Result

    Check the ITB cleaning unit. Clean or replace the image transfer belt. Replace the image transfer belt. Replace the ID sensors. Check the connection. Replace the BCU board. ID sensor ID sensor output Defective ID sensors output error is more than Poor connection D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 501: Line Position Adjustment Result

    See Note are not enough for line position adjustment. the target More lines on the pattern than Not used in this machine. the target Not used For details, see the "Troubleshooting Guide - Line Position Adjustment" section. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 503: Appendix: Troubleshooting Guide

    APPENDIX: TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE APPENDIX 6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 505: Appendix: Troubleshooting Guide

    Collect a capture file for further investigation (select Smeared image at trailing edge Check the fusing unit speed. 'Print to File' in the driver). Crow marks Check the humidity condition and adjust the transfer bias if necessary. b222t501 SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 506 When the PCDU is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the drum unit wears out, causing vertical color lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related color unit and replace it if necessary. d037t502 D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 507: Line Position Adjustment

    Possible cause/Countermeasure Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern White image, Abnormal image, Defective i-controller Low density Replace the high voltage power supply unit. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx). SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 508 Replace the image transfer belt. Replace the BCU. Defective PCU The skew for M, C, Y is more Defective laser unit than ±0.75 mm from the main Defective BCU scan registration of K Reinstall or replace the BCU. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 509 Replace the high voltage power supply unit. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx). Replace the BCU. Normal image, but with color Defective ID sensor registration errors Defective BCU Replace the ID sensor. Replace the BCU. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 510 The skew for M, C, Y is more Defective PCDU than ± 0.75 mm from the main Defective laser unit scan registration of K. – at the Defective BCU end of the scan line? Reinstall or replace the PCDU. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 511 Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Low image density on the output Low pattern density Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx). The main scan registration is Defective ID sensor at center SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 512 Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BCU Reinstall or replace the PCDU. Replace the laser optics housing unit. Replace the BCU. The sub scan lines are shifted. Defective PCDU Shifted lines appear cyclically. Defective drive unit Drum phase adjustment error D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 513: Image Problems At Regular Intervals

    6.1.3 IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS If a defect occurs in the image at one of these intervals, the related component may be defective. Development roller: 32 mm PTR (Paper Transfer Roller): 75.0 mm Drum: 94.2 mm Fusing belt: 157.1 mm SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 515: Appendix: Jam Detection

    APPENDIX: JAM DETECTION APPENDIX 7 JAM DETECTION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 517: Paper Jam Display

    Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size A4 LEF B4 SEF A5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF HLT LEF LT SEF A3 SEF HLT SEF A4 SEF Others A5 SEF SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 518: Jam Codes And Display Codes

    Fusing exit sensor does not detect 7504 19 Fusing Exit: ON paper. 7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not 7504 21 Relay Exit: ON detect paper. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 519 7504 65 Duplex Exit Sensor Duplex exit sensor does not turn off. Duplex Entrance Duplex entrance sensor does not turn 7504 67 Sensor off. 7504 68 1-Bin Exit: ON 1-bin tray exit sensor does not turn off. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 520 Stapler Unit Drive 7504 246 from the stapler unit movement motor of R1, R2 Motor the punch unit. The mainframe detects the lock signal 7504 247 Output Tray Motor from the feed motor of the internal R1, R2 finisher. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 521: Ardf (Original Jam)

    7505 3 Skew Correction: ON paper. Registration sensor does not detect 7505 4 Registration: ON paper. 7505 5 Paper Exit: ON Exit Sensor does not detect paper. 7505 53 Skew Correction: OFF Skew correction sensor does not turn SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 522 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display off. 7505 54 Registration: OFF Registration sensor does not turn off. 7505 55 Paper Exit: OFF Exit Sensor does not turn off. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 523: Sensor Locations

    Jam Detection Sensor Locations SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 525: Appendix: Electrical Component Defects

    APPENDIX: ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS APPENDIX 8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...

  • Page 527: Sensors

    CN214/2, 3 SC258/ SC400 Shorted ID Sensor Shutter Open/ CN232/4 SC400 Sensor Shorted Open Jam A2 (Jam17) Registration Sensor CN214/11 Shorted Jam B (Jam57) Drum Phase Sensor: Open/ CN220/2 SC380/SC396 Shorted Drum Phase Sensor: CN220/17 Open/ SC381/SC397 SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 528 Switch 12, 13, 15 Tray 1 is detected when Shorted tray 1 is not set. By-pass Paper Size CN221/9, Open/ Paper size error Sensor 10, 12, 13 Shorted By-pass Paper End CN221/18 Open Paper on the by-pass D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 529 TD Sensor - K SC372 Shorted CN212/A9, Open/ TD Sensor - M SC373 Shorted CN212/A3, Open/ TD Sensor - C SC374 Shorted CN212/A3, Open/ TD Sensor - Y SC375 Shorted Fusing Exit Sensor CN227/18 Open Jam C (Jam19) SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 530 Tray 2 Paper Size CN211/16, Open/ Paper size error Switch 17, 18, 20 Shorted Printed image has Temperature/ CN222/15, Open/ some problems such as Humidity Sensor Shorted rough image, dirty background, weak D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 531 Platen cover open Platen Cover Sensor CN205/5 Shorted cannot be detected. Open/ ITB Contact Sensor CN234/5 SC442 Shorted Open (Jam 24) Inverter Sensor CN227/15 Shorted Jam C (Jam64) Right Lower Door "Open Cover" is CN219/13 Open Open Switch displayed. SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 532: Blown Fuse Conditions

    10A/125V 24VS power to the BCU is not supplied. 24V power to the DRB and i-controller is not 6.3A/125V 6.3A/125V supplied. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...

  • Page 533: Appendix: Sp Mode Tables

    APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES APPENDIX 9 SP MODE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 12/08/2008 SP1001 189 ~ 190 07/15/2010 Added SP5104 05/07/2009 SP5113 200 ~ 201 04/16/2009 SP5420 05/21/2009 SP5801 05/21/2009 SP5824 248 ~ 250 11/12/2009 SP5894 12/20/2010 A new BitSwitch#6-7 has been added.

  • Page 535: System Service Mode

    *ENG 007 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi *ENG 008 By-pass: M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 009 Duplex:Plain:600dpi *ENG 010 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG ⇒ 011 Tray:Plain:1200dpi *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] ⇒ 012 Tray:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG ⇒ 013 Tray:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 014 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 536 1003 Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing. 001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi *ENG 003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 537 017 Tray1:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG 018 Tray234:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG 019 Tray234:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 020 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 021 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG 022 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi *ENG 023 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi *ENG 024 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 025 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 026 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 538 [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 018 Extra Idling Time (M) *ENG 019 Ex Idling Temp:P-Roll *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 020 Control Switch Temp *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 deg/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 539 Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special Fusing Ready Temp. *ENG [145 to 155 / 150 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition. P-Roll Ready Target Temp. *ENG [140 to 160 / 140 / 1 deg/step] SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 540 030 Plain:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG [125 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg /step] 031 Plain: FC: Simplex: Ends *ENG 032 Plain:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 033 Plain: FC: Duplex: Ends *ENG 034 Plain: BW: Simplex:Center *ENG 035 Plain: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 541 056 OHP: FC *ENG [125 to 175 / 160 / 1 deg /step] 057 OHP: BW *ENG [125 to 175 / 150 / 1 deg /step] 058 SP 1:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG [125 to 175 / 155 / 1 deg/step] SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 542 *ENG 075 SP 3:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG 076 SP 3:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 077 SP 3:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG [125 to 175 / 150 / 1 deg/step] 078 SP 3:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 079 SP 3:BW:Simplex:Ends *ENG 080 SP 3:BW:Duplex:Center *ENG 081 SP 3:BW:Duplex:Ends *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 SM Appendix...
  • Page 543 115 M-Thick: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG 116 M-Thick: BW: Duplex: Ends *ENG 120 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Center *ENG [125 to 175 / 150 / 1 deg/step] 121 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Ends *ENG 122 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Center *ENG 123 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Ends *ENG SM Appendix D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 544 [110 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step] 143 Glossy: Plain1: Ends *ENG 144 Glossy: Plain2:Center *ENG [110 to 160 / 130 / 1 deg/step] 145 Glossy: Plain2: Ends *ENG 146 Glossy: MThick:Center *ENG [110 to 160 / 135 / 1 deg/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 545 163 SP 5:BW:Duplex:Ends *ENG 164 SP 6:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG [135 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step] 165 SP 6:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG 166 SP 6:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 167 SP 6:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG 168 SP 6:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 169 SP 6:BW:Simplex:Ends *ENG SM Appendix 9-11 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 546 The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller. 003 Pressure Roller: Center [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 004 Pressure Roller:Ends [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 547 [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 003 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller. When the low temperature condition (specified with SP1112-001) is detected, the value of this SP is added to the heating roller temperature. SM Appendix 9-13 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 548 Idling Time *ENG [0 to 60 / 2 / 0.1 sec/step] Specifies the length of each idling operation during stand-by mode. 003 Idling Speed *ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 mm/sec/step] 1116 [Fusing Temp Change] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 549 [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 016 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center) when the paper width is less than 226 mm. The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116-021. SM Appendix 9-15 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 550 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper. 022 Center Temp.1:Duplex:226- [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 023 Ends Temp.1:Duplex:226- 024 Center Temp.2:Duplex:226- 025 Ends Temp.2:Duplex:226- D037/D038/D040/D041 9-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 551 Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after job end. This idling prevents the heating roller overheating after job end. 1118 [Curl Temp Correction] 001 Operation Pattern *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1] SM Appendix 9-17 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 552 006 M-Thick: Ends *ENG 007 Thick1: Center *ENG 008 Thick1: Ends *ENG [0 to 100 / 70 / 1 %] 009 Thick2: Center *ENG 010 Thick2: Ends *ENG 011 Thick3: Center *ENG 012 Thick3: Ends *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-18 SM Appendix...
  • Page 553 029 Fgate Timer:BW:Full *ENG [0 to 10000 / 5300 / 100msec] 030 Fgate Timer:BW:Full *ENG [0 to 10000 / 0 / 100msec] 031 Fgate Timer:BW:Half *ENG [0 to 10000 / 400 / 100msec] [FF Correct Time] SM Appendix 9-19 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 554 [–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 002 Regist Mot:120 *ENG 003 Bk OpcDevMot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.4 / 0.01 %/step] 004 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick *ENG 005 Color OpcMot:120 *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-20 SM Appendix...
  • Page 555 [–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] 023 Reverse:CCW60:Thick *ENG 024 Reverse:CCW120 *ENG 025 Duplex Entrance:60 *ENG 026 Duplex Entrance:120 *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 027 Duplex Exit:60 *ENG 028 Duplex Exit:120 *ENG SM Appendix 9-21 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 556 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 1803 [Sub Mag ADJ] 001 Plain:600dpi:input *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] 002 Plain:1200dpi:input *ENG 003 Thick:input *ENG 004 Plain:600dpi:result *ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 557 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 003 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:OFF *ENG 1950 [Fan Cooling Time Set] 001 Development Fan1 *ENG [0 to 600 / 0 / 1sec/step] 002 Development Fan2 *ENG 003 Imaging Fan *ENG SM Appendix 9-23 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 558: Sp2-Xxx (Drum)

    005 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG 006 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG 007 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG 008 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [Charge DC V:Fixed] 2006 (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 559 [0 to 3000 / 750 / 10 ųA/step] [Charge AC A: ML] Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color) 2008 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for ML environment (Middle temperature and Low humidity). DFU SM Appendix 9-25 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 560 004 Environmental Target: Y *ENG [0 to 3000 / 880 / 10 ųA/step] [Charge AC A: HH] Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for HH (Color) 2011 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for HH environment D037/D038/D040/D041 9-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 561 [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step] 002 Forced Setting *ENG 0: The environmental condition is determined automatically. 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH 003 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 1 *ENG Changes the humidity threshold SM Appendix 9-27 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 562 Displays the previous relative 012 Relative Humidity: Display *ENG humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step] Displays the previous absolute 013 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 563 014 Correction Coeff. *ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 kV/mA/step] 2015 [Charge AC Adj: Result] 001 Bk *ENG 002 C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y *ENG SM Appendix 9-29 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 564 006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd *ENG length adjustment. 007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd *ENG [0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step] 009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd *ENG 010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd *ENG 012 Main Mag.: Y:Low Spd *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 565 004 Y: High Speed *ENG thinner on the output. 009 Bk: Low Speed *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker on the output. 010 C: Low Speed *ENG 011 M: Low Speed *ENG 012 Y: Low Speed *ENG SM Appendix 9-31 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 566 7: Grid pattern Small 8: Grid pattern Large 9: Argyle Pattern Small 10: Argyle Pattern Large 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 14. Trimming Area 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 567 SP again. Executes the rough line position adjustment once. 003 Execute:Mode c After doing this SP, make sure to execute SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position adjustment is not perfectly done. SM Appendix 9-33 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 568 Optics Housing Unit” in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section. [Skew Adjustment Display] 2119 Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor. 001 C *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 002 M *ENG 003 Y *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 569 Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2142 Bk, M, C, Y: ID sensors for the process control Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Maximum *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] [TM-Sensor Test] DFU SM Appendix 9-35 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 570 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Maximum 2: *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] DFU [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 005 Maximum 2: Front *ENG 006 Maximum 2: Center *ENG 007 Maximum 2: Rear *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-36 SM Appendix...
  • Page 571 031 Bk: Area4 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step ] 032 Bk: Area5 *ENG 033 Bk: Area6 *ENG 034 Bk: Area7 *ENG 035 Bk: Area8 *ENG SM Appendix 9-37 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 572 [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 184 Y: Area1 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [–256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 185 Y: Area2 *ENG 186 Y: Area3 *ENG 187 Y: Area4 *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-38 SM Appendix...
  • Page 573 *ENG 007 Bk: Area 6 *ENG 008 Bk: Area 7 *ENG 009 Bk: Area 8 *ENG 010 Bk: Area 9 *ENG 011 Bk: Area 10 *ENG 012 Bk: Area 11 *ENG 013 Bk: Area 12 *ENG SM Appendix 9-39 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 574 [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] This is for the synchronizing detection 065 M: Area 0 *ENG board. [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 066 M: Area 1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 575 098 Y: Area 1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 099 Y: Area 2 *ENG 100 Y: Area 3 *ENG 101 Y: Area 4 *ENG 102 Y: Area 5 *ENG 103 Y: Area 6 *ENG SM Appendix 9-41 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 576 *ENG [10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] 005 1200dpi:Bk *ENG 006 1200dpi:C *ENG 007 1200dpi:M *ENG 008 1200dpi:Y *ENG 2180 [Line Pos. Adj. Clear] 001 Color Regist. 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Mag. Correction D037/D038/D040/D041 9-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 577 [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 012 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG SM Appendix 9-43 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 578 [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 036 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 037 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 579 058 Drum Cor.:600:Subdot *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step] 059 S. Cor.:1200 Subdot *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 060 Drum Cor.:1200:Subdot *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step] SM Appendix 9-45 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 580 [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line] 023 S. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line] 026 S. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 581 1: Enable correction 007 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG 008 Area Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG 009 Area Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step] 010 Area Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG SM Appendix 9-47 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 582 [–131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step] 016 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step] 017 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a2 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / –63398 / 1 bit/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 583 [0.5 to 3 / 1.4 / 0.1 V/step] 002 ch 0: 2nd *ENG 003 ch 0: 3rd *ENG 004 ch 0: 4th *ENG 005 ch 1: 1st *ENG 006 ch 1: 2nd *ENG 007 ch 1: 3rd *ENG SM Appendix 9-49 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 584 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 585 [MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result 001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step] 002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step] 003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step] SM Appendix 9-51 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 586 2198 [Music A/D Interval] [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 μs/step] 001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG 2199 [Music Time Setting] DFU 001 Error Time Set *ENG [0.1 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 sec /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-52 SM Appendix...
  • Page 587 Default: ON) is activated. After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP modes are used for printing. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 800 / 450 / 10 –V/step] SM Appendix 9-53 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 588 3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity) 4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity) 5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity) Absolute Humidity: Threshold 1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m /step] Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 589 Paper is detected as "S3" size. [0 to 350 / 150 / 1 mm/step] Threshold 4 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 3: 004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size. Paper ≤ Threshold 4: Paper is detected as "S5" size. SM Appendix 9-55 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 590 [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step] Adjusts the positive current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller. 004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-56 SM Appendix...
  • Page 591 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper. [0 to 60 / 12 / 1 μA] Image Transfer: Low Speed:C *ENG Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for SM Appendix 9-57 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 592 014 Image Transfer: Low Speed:M *ENG 015 Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step] [Plain: Bias: BW] 2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black-and-white mode. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 593 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper width) SM Appendix 9-59 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 594 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 595 006 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S2 *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper width) SM Appendix 9-61 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 596 (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) 018 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S5 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-62 SM Appendix...
  • Page 597 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm 008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2 *ENG (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step] 250 mm ≥ S3 size ≥ 194 mm 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S3 *ENG (Paper width) SM Appendix 9-63 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 598 [1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step] 018 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 41 / 1/step] 019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-64 SM Appendix...
  • Page 599 250 mm ≥ S3 size ≥ 194 mm 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S3 *ENG (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S3 *ENG 250 mm ≥ S3 size ≥ 194 mm SM Appendix 9-65 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 600 019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step] 020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) 2421 [Plain:L-Edge Correction] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-66 SM Appendix...
  • Page 601 SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these 2423 SP values. Standard: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424. 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] SM Appendix 9-67 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 602 010 Paper Transfer: BW:Low:2nd *ENG 011 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step] 012 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 31 / 1 /step] 2453 [Thin: Bias: BW] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-68 SM Appendix...
  • Page 603 Standard: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG SM Appendix 9-69 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 604 [1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step] 011 Paper Transfer: FC: Standard: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 44 / 1 /step] 2482 [Glossy: Bias: BW] 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 –μA /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-70 SM Appendix...
  • Page 605 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in 2502 black-and-white mode. Thick: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 –μA /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 –μA /step] SM Appendix 9-71 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 606 [100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 825 / 5%/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-72 SM Appendix...
  • Page 607 [100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 665 / 5%/step] SM Appendix 9-73 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 608 [1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG [1 to 50 / 5 / 1/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-74 SM Appendix...
  • Page 609 [1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG [1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step] SM Appendix 9-75 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 610 [Thick 1: T-Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the 2523 paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. Thick: 60 mm/sec D037/D038/D040/D041 9-76 SM Appendix...
  • Page 611 Thick: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 –μA /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 –μA /step] 2558 [Thick 2: Bias: FC] SM Appendix 9-77 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 612 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values. 2573 Thick: 60 mm/sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2574. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-78 SM Appendix...
  • Page 613 [0 to 200 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 13 / 1 –μA /step] [OHP: Bias: FC] 2608 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 200 / NA: 24, EU/AA: 20 / 1 –μA /step] SM Appendix 9-79 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 614 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [–100 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 2630 [OHP: Env. Correct Table] 002 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / NA: 39, EU/AA: 26 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-80 SM Appendix...
  • Page 615 003 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG [Thick 3: Switch Timing: L-Edge] 2655 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image SM Appendix 9-81 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 616 003 Paper Transfer:BW:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer:BW:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 13 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-82 SM Appendix...
  • Page 617 [0 to 400 / 100 / 5-uA /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [M-Thick:SwTiming:L-Edge] 2722 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer:Standard:1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2-uA /step] SM Appendix 9-83 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 618 005 Paper Transfer:FC:Standard:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1-uA /step] 006 Paper Transfer:FC:Standard:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 33 / 1-uA /step] 009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 32 / 1-uA /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-84 SM Appendix...
  • Page 619 [0 to 200 / 14 / 1 –μA /step] [SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:BW] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for 2761 each paper size. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values. Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec SM Appendix 9-85 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 620 [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3 *ENG 250 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3 *ENG 250 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-86 SM Appendix...
  • Page 621 SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values. Standard: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] *ENG S1 size ≥ 290 mm (Paper width) Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: *ENG SM Appendix 9-87 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 622 [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: *ENG [100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-88 SM Appendix...
  • Page 623 S1 size ≥ 290 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: [1 to 50 / 23 / 1%/step] *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper SM Appendix 9-89 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 624 [1 to 50 / 15 / 1%/step] Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 35 / 1%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper D037/D038/D040/D041 9-90 SM Appendix...
  • Page 625 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 16 / 1%/step] Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper width) SM Appendix 9-91 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 626 [1 to 50 / 22 / 1%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 4 / 1%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-92 SM Appendix...
  • Page 627 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG SM Appendix 9-93 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 628 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [SP 1: Env. Correct Table] 2780 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 003 Paper Transfer:BW:Standard:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1-uA /step] 004 Paper Transfer:BW:Standard:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1-uA /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-94 SM Appendix...
  • Page 629 [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] 001 Paper Transfer: Normal S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 290 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Normal: S2 *ENG 290 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 250 mm (Paper SM Appendix 9-95 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 630 013 Paper Transfer: Normal: S4 *ENG 194 mm ≥ S4 size ≥ 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: Normal: S5 *ENG 150 mm ≥ S5 size (Paper width) 2793 [SP4,5,6-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-96 SM Appendix...
  • Page 631 [1 to 50 / 50 / 1%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Normal: S3 *ENG 250 mm ≥ S2 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 013 Paper Transfer: Normal: S4 *ENG [1 to 50 / 35 / 1%/step] SM Appendix 9-97 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 632 SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values. 2797 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2798. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 2798 [SP 4: Sw Timing: T-Edge] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-98 SM Appendix...
  • Page 633 [0 to 200 / 28 / 1 –μA /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 –μA /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 14 / 1 –μA /step] SM Appendix 9-99 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 634 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. 2823 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2824. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-100 SM Appendix...
  • Page 635 010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 21 / 1-uA /step] 011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 48 / 1-uA /step] 012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 28 / 1-uA /step] SM Appendix 9-101 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 636 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 2847 [SP5: T-Edge Correct] Special 5 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction D037/D038/D040/D041 9-102 SM Appendix...
  • Page 637 *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 –μA /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1 –μA /step] 2857 [Special 3: Bias: FC] SM Appendix 9-103 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 638 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-104 SM Appendix...
  • Page 639 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [SP 3: Env. Correct Table] 2880 Standard: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 003 Paper Transfer:BW:Standard:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1-uA /step] 004 Paper Transfer:BW:Standard:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1-uA /step] SM Appendix 9-105 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 640 SP2883 and SP2887 are multiplied by these SP values. 2895 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2896. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-106 SM Appendix...
  • Page 641 [1 to 50 / 17 / 1-uA /step] 005 Paper Transfer:FC: 1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 29 / 1-uA /step] 2900 [Drum Idling Time] 003 Normal Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 5 / 1sec /step] SM Appendix 9-107 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 642 [GainAdj:TransferM] Gain Adjustment of Image Transfer Belt Motor 2908 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 120 mm/sec *ENG 0: GAIN: High speed 1: GAIN: Low speed [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 002 60 mm/sec *ENG 0: GAIN: High speed D037/D038/D040/D041 9-108 SM Appendix...
  • Page 643 1: ENC Control 002 SC443 Count *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step] 2921 [ITB Speed Control] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 001 On/Off *ENG 0: Disavailable 1: Available 002 Execute *ENG SM Appendix 9-109 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 644 [0 or 65535 / 5280 / 1 /step] 060 Pha. Coeff 2 LPF *ENG [0 or 65535 / 10560 / 1 /step] 061 Pha. Coeff 3 LPF *ENG [0 or 65535 / 15840 / 1 /step] 2922 [ITB SP Ctrl Counter] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-110 SM Appendix...
  • Page 645 *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 2970 [Cleaning After JOB] 001 No Refresh *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 002 Refresh *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] SM Appendix 9-111 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 646 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ] Executes the process control that is 005 With Normal MUSIC normally done at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC (line position adjustment) once. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-112 SM Appendix...
  • Page 647 010 Result: Latest 9 *ENG 3013 [TD Sen Initial Setting] Developer Initialization Setting 001 Execution: ALL 002 Execution: COL 003 Execution: Bk [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 004 Execution: C 005 Execution: M 006 Execution: Y SM Appendix 9-113 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 648 Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color. 001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG 002 Supply Time: C *ENG [0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step] 003 Supply Time: M *ENG 004 Supply Time: Y *ENG 3020 [Vt Limit Error] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-114 SM Appendix...
  • Page 649 [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 sec/step] 003 Agitation Time: M *ENG 004 Agitation Time: Y *ENG 005-008 Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color. DFU 005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] SM Appendix 9-115 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 650 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx) 1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control) Selects the LD power control mode. Pre-ACC Process *ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-116 SM Appendix...
  • Page 651 [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by mode. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) SM Appendix 9-117 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 652 Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to be low. C-pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density D037/D038/D040/D041 9-118 SM Appendix...
  • Page 653 Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values (SP3611-005) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009). SM Appendix 9-119 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 654 0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with 002 C *ENG SP 3401) 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed) 003 M *ENG 2: PID (Vtref_Control) 3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed) 004 Y *ENG 4: MBD (Vtref_Control) 3045 [Toner End Detection: Set] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-120 SM Appendix...
  • Page 655 010 Toner Remaining: C *ENG [–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 011 Toner Remaining: M *ENG 012 Toner Remaining: Y *ENG 013-016 Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end SM Appendix 9-121 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 656 *ENG 029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG 031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG 032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-122 SM Appendix...
  • Page 657 048 Bottle Motor Off Time: M *ENG 049 Bottle Motor Off Time: Y *ENG 050-053 050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk *ENG [1 to 600 / 33 / 1 g/step] 051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C *ENG 052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M *ENG SM Appendix 9-123 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 658 Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: M *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG 3211 [Vt Shift: Display/Set] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-124 SM Appendix...
  • Page 659 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization. 005-008 005 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 Initial: C *ENG [2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Initial: M *ENG 008 Initial: Y *ENG 3222 [Vtref: Display/Set] SM Appendix 9-125 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 660 001 Lower: Bk *ENG 002 Lower: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Lower: M *ENG 004 Lower: Y *ENG 005 Upper: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-126 SM Appendix...
  • Page 661 3224 Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color. 001 Low Coverage Coeffi. Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step] 002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG 003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M *ENG SM Appendix 9-127 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 662 021 Initial ProCon Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 6 / 1 time/step] 022 High Coverage Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 %/step] 023 Process Control Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-128 SM Appendix...
  • Page 663 [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 020 PID:P:LowSpd *ENG 021 AWILOW:K *ENG 022 AWILOW:C *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0.125 / 0.0001 /step] 023 AWILOW:M *ENG 024 AWILOW:Y *ENG 025 AWPUP:K *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0.125 / 0.0001 /step] SM Appendix 9-129 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 664 047 ANC:Ver.:K *ENG 048 ANC:Ver.:K *ENG 049 ANC:Hori.:LowSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.6 / 0.01 /step] 050 ANC:Ver.:LowSpd *ENG 051 ANCG:Long:A:K *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.66 / 0.01 /step] 052 ANCG:Long:A:C *ENG 053 ANCG:Long:A:M *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-130 SM Appendix...
  • Page 665 [0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 /step] 086 PIX:TBL:7 *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.86 / 0.01 /step] 087 PIX:TBL:8 *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.85 / 0.01 /step] 088 PIX:TBL:9 *ENG 089 PIX:TBL:10 *ENG 090 PIX:TBL:11 *ENG SM Appendix 9-131 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 666 002 Vt Proportion: C *ENG [0 to 2550 / 50 / 1 /step] 003 Vt Proportion: M *ENG 004 Vt Proportion: Y *ENG 005 Pixel Proportion: Bk *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.47 / 0.01 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-132 SM Appendix...
  • Page 667 3234 [Pixel-Prop. Coeff.3:Set] DFU 001 Correction Value 1 *ENG [-0.1 to 0 / -0.01 / 0.01 /step] 002 Correction Value 2 *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.01 /step] 3235 [Toner Supply Coeff.: Display] DFU SM Appendix 9-133 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 668 003 Latest: M *ENG 004 Latest: Y *ENG [Developer Agitation Setting] 3237 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color. DFU 001 Agitation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-134 SM Appendix...
  • Page 669 012 P Rank 4 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.15 / 0.01 /step] 013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt. 013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step] SM Appendix 9-135 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 670 005 Offset: Bk *ENG 006 Offset: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 27 / 1 /step] 007 Offset: M *ENG 008 Offset: Y *ENG 017 Low Speed Coeff.:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-136 SM Appendix...
  • Page 671 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251-018. 009 Average M: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step] SM Appendix 9-137 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 672 *ENG 025 Latest Coverage: C *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step] 026 Latest Coverage: M *ENG 027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG 028 Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-138 SM Appendix...
  • Page 673 010 P/TM Sensor All for all sensors [Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg] 3322 Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor. 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step] SM Appendix 9-139 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 674 004 Vofset Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Vsg Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Vsg Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-140 SM Appendix...
  • Page 675 003 K5: Upper *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.01 /step] 004 K5: Lower *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 005 Kn: Upper *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01 /step] SM Appendix 9-141 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 676 [0 to 2500 / 1335 / 1 msec/step] Adjusts the processing timing for the pattern that is used for the line position 004 MUSIC Delay Time *ENG adjustment. [-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-142 SM Appendix...
  • Page 677 *ENG [Toner Supply Rate: Display] 3411 Displays the current toner supply rate. 001 Latest: Bk *ENG 002 Latest: C *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step] 003 Latest: M *ENG 004 Latest: Y *ENG SM Appendix 9-143 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 678 [Toner Supply Carry Over: Setting] DFU 001 Maximum: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum: C *ENG [0 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 msec/step] 003 Maximum: M *ENG 004 Maximum: Y *ENG [Process Control Target M/A] 3501 Adjusts the target M/A. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-144 SM Appendix...
  • Page 679 [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step] 003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step] 004 Interrupt: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step] SM Appendix 9-145 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 680 Correction Coeff. 2: Interrupt: *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] Max. Number Correction *ENG [0 to 99 / 2 / 1/step] Threshold Max. Number Correction *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] Counter D037/D038/D040/D041 9-146 SM Appendix...
  • Page 681 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions. 001 Job End: Potential *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step] SM Appendix 9-147 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 682 [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm /step] 007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG 008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG 009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG 010 Required Area: Bk *ENG 011 Required Area: C *ENG 012 Required Area: M *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-148 SM Appendix...
  • Page 683 030 Mode Counter:Bk *ENG 031 Mode Counter:FC *ENG [Blade Damage Prevention] 3517 Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this SM Appendix 9-149 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 684 011 Blade Damage Prevention *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sets “1”, when the following values shows. 012 Vsg Average Error *ENG Vsg_reg_ave: 3.5 ≤ Vsg_reg_ave ≤ 4.5 or Vsg_dif_ave: 0.0 ≤ Vsg_dif_ave ≤ 0.5 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-150 SM Appendix...
  • Page 685 002 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step] 003 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1°C/step] SM Appendix 9-151 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 686 Displays the current development gamma for C/M/Y. 003 M (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 004 Y (Current) *ENG Displays the target development gamma 005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG for Bk. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-152 SM Appendix...
  • Page 687 017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG 018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG 019 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG [1 to 99 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step] 020 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG 021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG SM Appendix 9-153 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 688 [Charge DC Control: Display] Standard: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 3631 Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG [0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-154 SM Appendix...
  • Page 689 Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment. 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG 003 Standard Speed:M *ENG 004 Standard Speed:Y *ENG 009 Low Speed:Bk *ENG SM Appendix 9-155 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 690 [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step] 012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-156 SM Appendix...
  • Page 691 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step] [HST Control: M] 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU. SM Appendix 9-157 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 692 004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-158 SM Appendix...
  • Page 693 *ENG [0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step] Enables or disables the calling for @Remote. 011 Notice Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Enable @Remote calling 1: Disable @Remote calling SM Appendix 9-159 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 694 *ENG [0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step] Enables or disables the calling for @Remote. 011 Notice Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Enable @Remote calling 1: Disable @Remote calling D037/D038/D040/D041 9-160 SM Appendix...
  • Page 695 002 Development Unit: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 003 Development Unit: M *ENG 004 Development Unit: Y *ENG 005 Developer: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] SM Appendix 9-161 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 696 0: OFF, 1: ON ITB Toner Collection *ENG Bottle SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. Sub Scan Mag. *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA Adjustment D037/D038/D040/D041 9-162 SM Appendix...
  • Page 697 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following 4013 mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] SM Appendix 9-163 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 698 [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Off 003 Correction Level *ENG 1: Weakest 2: Weak 3: Strong 4: Strongest [APS Operation Check] 4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input Check Table".) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-164 SM Appendix...
  • Page 699 [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit /step] 002 Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec /step] 003 Lamp ON:Delay Time [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec /step] 4310 [Scan Size Detect Value] SM Appendix 9-165 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 700 007 ADF: Left 008 ADF: Right [IPU Test Pattern] 4417 Selects the IPU test pattern. Test Pattern [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ] 13: Grid pattern CMYK Selection 0: Scanned image 14: Color patch CMYK D037/D038/D040/D041 9-166 SM Appendix...
  • Page 701 0: High 1: Lowest 001 - *ENG 2: Lower 3: Default 4: Higher 5: Highest 4450 [Scan Image Path Selection] 001 Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON SM Appendix 9-167 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 702 007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG 008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG [ACC Correction:Bright] 4505 Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern. 001 Master:K *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 002 Master:C *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-168 SM Appendix...
  • Page 703 [R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters. 001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG Specifies the printer vector correction value. 005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B SM Appendix 9-169 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 704 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. -006 Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-170 SM Appendix...
  • Page 705 Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast. I Dot Erase (0), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step] -009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of SM Appendix 9-171 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 706 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step] -009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. 0: Not activated 4600 [SBU Version Display] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-172 SM Appendix...
  • Page 707 0: OFF, 1: ON 4609 [Gray Balance Set: R] 001 Book Scan [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step] 002 DF Scan [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step] 4610 [Gray Balance Set: G] SM Appendix 9-173 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 708 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the 002 Latest: GO Color CCD circuit board (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-174 SM Appendix...
  • Page 709 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjust] 4631 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Latest: RE Color [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: RO Color SM Appendix 9-175 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 710 If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs. [Black Level Adj. Display] 4654 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Last Correct Value: RE Displays the black offset value (rough *ENG Color adjustment) for the even red signal in the D037/D038/D040/D041 9-176 SM Appendix...
  • Page 711 Displays the black offset value (rough Last Correct Value: BO adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the *ENG Color CCD circuit board (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 4658 [Analog Gain Adjust] SM Appendix 9-177 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 712 002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust] 4663 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG D037/D038/D040/D041 9-178 SM Appendix...
  • Page 713 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the Factory Setting: BE black level adjustment (rough adjustment) *ENG Color for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing speed). SM Appendix 9-179 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 714 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Latest: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: RO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust] 4681 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-180 SM Appendix...
  • Page 715 4691 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. 001 GE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 GO [White Level Peak Read] 4692 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. SM Appendix 9-181 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 716 Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or off. Press "OFF" to stop this free run. 002 Lamp OFF Otherwise, the free run lasts. 4804 [Home Position Opetation] 001 - Executes the scanner HP detection. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-182 SM Appendix...
  • Page 717 004 R DATA2 *ENG Photo C Patch Level 17 (8-bit) 005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit) 006 B DATA2 *ENG Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit) 4904 [IPU Board Test] Test1 Bit0: TAURUS register SM Appendix 9-183 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 718 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU 4909 [Man Gamma:Photo:Mono Bk] DFU 4910 [Man Gamma:Text:Bk] 4911 [Man Gamma:Text:C] 4912 [Man Gamma:Text:M] 4913 [Man Gamma:Text:Y] 001 Offset:Highlight *ENG [0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-184 SM Appendix...
  • Page 719 003 Offset:Shadow *ENG 004 Offset:Idmax *ENG 005 Option:Highlight *ENG 006 Option:Middle *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Option:Shadow *ENG 008 Option:Idmax *ENG 4948 [ACC History: Latest] 001 YY/MM/DD *ENG 002 HH/MM/SS *ENG SM Appendix 9-185 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 720 8: RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction 9: RGB image done by Filtering correction 10: RGB images done by Full color ADS 11: RGB image done by Color correction 4993 [High Light Correction] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG Selects the Highlight correction level. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-186 SM Appendix...
  • Page 721 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments 1: Prints SM Appendix 9-187 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 722 0: Not display, 1: Display [Toner Remaining Icon Display] 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display D037/D038/D040/D041 9-188 SM Appendix...
  • Page 723 If the user service is selected, PM alert is displayed on the LCD. 001 PCU:Bk *CTL 002 PCU:M *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 003 PCU:C *CTL 004 PCU:Y *CTL 005 Dev Unit:Bk *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 006 Dev Unit:M *CTL SM Appendix 9-189 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 724 3: Prepaid card 4: Coin rack 5: MF key card 8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer Model D037 0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down) 5: MF key card Important: Only set this mode to one of the values mentioned above.
  • Page 725 [APS Mode] [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled] 001 This program disables the APS. 5128 [Code Mode With Key/Card Option] *CTL - 001 DFU 5131 [Paper Size Type Selection] *ENG [0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU] SM Appendix 9-191 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 726 SP before you go into the printer SP mode. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled 1: Enabled [By-pass Size Error Detection] 5179 Turns on or off the by-pass tray size error message. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-192 SM Appendix...
  • Page 727 [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 009 TRAY 3: 1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 010 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG 0: A3, 1: DLT SM Appendix 9-193 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 728 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 - *ENG 0: Disable 1: Enable [Copy NV Version] 5188 Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board. 001 - 5195 [Limitless SW] DFU 001 - D037/D038/D040/D041 9-194 SM Appendix...
  • Page 729 [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, SM Appendix 9-195 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 730: Access Control

    When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU Whenever a new login user is added to 103 Default Document ACL *CTL the address book in external certification mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the D037/D038/D040/D041 9-196 SM Appendix...
  • Page 731 Method (DFU) 220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL SDK3 Certification *CTL Method 230 SDK certification device *CTL 240 Detail Option *CTL 5404 [User Code Counter Clear] 001 UCodeCtrClr *CTL Clears all counters for users. 5411 [LDAP Certification] SM Appendix 9-197 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 732 Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user 004 Cancellation Time *CTL ID and password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on). D037/D038/D040/D041 9-198 SM Appendix...
  • Page 733 [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec.] 5416 [Access Information] Limits the number of users used by the Access User Max access exclusion and password attack *CTL Number detection functions. [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users] SM Appendix 9-199 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 734 [50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt] 5420 [User Authentication] These settings should be done with the System Administrator. Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has D037/D038/D040/D041 9-200 SM Appendix...
  • Page 735 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: On, 1: Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF 051 SDK1 Determines whether certification is 061 SDK2 required before a user can use the SDK 071 SDK3 application. SM Appendix 9-201 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 736 002 Count Mode Setting *CTL 5501 [PM Alarm] Sets the PM alarm interval 001 PM Alarm Level *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1k printouts / step] 0: No PM Alarm 002 Original Count Alarm *CTL D037/D038/D040/D041 9-202 SM Appendix...
  • Page 737 @Remote, when the following conditions 080 Toner Call Timing occur. 0: At replacement 1: At near end 128 Interval :Others [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU 132 Interval :A3 133 Interval :A4 SM Appendix 9-203 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 738 Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step] 013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call. This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1". D037/D038/D040/D041 9-204 SM Appendix...
  • Page 739 Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. SM Appendix 9-205 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 740 The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not cleared. 5792 [MCS Debug SW] 001 1 002 2 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-206 SM Appendix...
  • Page 741 The following service settings: Bit switches Gamma settings (User & Service) Toner Limit 008 Printer application The following user settings: Tray Priority Menu Protect System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver SM Appendix 9-207 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 742 019 LCS 020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings. 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings. 5803 [Input Check] See "Input Check Table" in this section. 5804 [Output Check] See "Output Check Table" in this section. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-208 SM Appendix...
  • Page 743 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). 003 Supply *CTL SM Appendix 9-209 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 744 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 004 Comunication Test Call 005 Device Information Call SSL Disable Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-210 SM Appendix...
  • Page 745 021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag. 0: Installation not completed 1: Installation completed RCG – C Registed Detail This SP displays the Cumin installation status. 0: Basil not registered 1: Basil registered 2: Device registered 023 Connect Type (N/M) SM Appendix 9-211 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 746 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name. The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-212 SM Appendix...
  • Page 747 GW URL. The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored. SM Appendix 9-213 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 748 The ID of the request for certification. 083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update. This setting determines if the firmware can be 084 Non-HDD Firm Up updated, even without the HDD installed. 0: Not allowed update D037/D038/D040/D041 9-214 SM Appendix...
  • Page 749 Asteriskes () indicate that no DESS exists. Displays the start time of the period for which the 093 CERT: Valid Start current NRS certification is enabled. 094 CERT: Valid End Displays the end time of the period for which the SM Appendix 9-215 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 750 Line Type Judgment Result Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of what the numbers mean. 0: Success 1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait. 2: Line abnormal D037/D038/D040/D041 9-216 SM Appendix...
  • Page 751 The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause. The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including commas). Dial Up User Name Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these SM Appendix 9-217 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 752 SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used. Default: 0 Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 164 Line Connecting This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting D037/D038/D040/D041 9-218 SM Appendix...
  • Page 753 201 Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device. 0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set. 1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this SM Appendix 9-219 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 754 Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. 206 Register Execute Executes Cumin Registration. Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result. 0: Succeeded 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-220 SM Appendix...
  • Page 755 Response from GW -2385 correct international prefix for the telephone number. -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for same device -2392 Parameter error SM Appendix 9-221 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 756 [NV-RAM Data Download] Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For 5825 details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the “System Maintenance Reference” of the Field Service Manual. 001 NV-RAM Download D037/D038/D040/D041 9-222 SM Appendix...
  • Page 757 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at Job Spooling Clear: Start power on. Time 0: ON (Data is cleared) 1: OFF (Automatically printed) SM Appendix 9-223 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 758 Active IPv6 Stateless "Status Address" + "Prefix Length" Address 2 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. Active IPv6 Stateless Address 3 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 4 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-224 SM Appendix...
  • Page 759 Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web 237 Web shopping link visible system. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 760 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) 007 Mail RX Data 008 Mail TX Data HDD Formatting (Data for a Design) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-226 SM Appendix...
  • Page 761 MLB. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed. 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR 081 Format for Copy Color This SP is not used in this SM Appendix 9-227 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 762 This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Sets the IP address for the secondary capture Secondary srv IP server. This is basically adjusted by the remote address system. 112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-228 SM Appendix...
  • Page 763 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi 5840 [IEEE 802.11b] [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step] 006 Channel MAX *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 SM Appendix 9-229 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 764 0 x 13 – 0 x FE (reserved) 0 x 12 – 72M (reserved) 0 x 09 – 22M (reserved) Selects the WEP key. 011 WEP key Select *CTL [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-230 SM Appendix...
  • Page 765 002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan user presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen. 003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow 004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta 007 OrgStamp 011 Staple Std1 012 Staple Std2 SM Appendix 9-231 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 766 Displays the development release *CTL Number version number. DFU 100 Notify Unsupport *CTL [Delivery Server Setting] *CTL 5845 Provides items for delivery server settings. 001 FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-232 SM Appendix...
  • Page 767 Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists SM Appendix 9-233 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 768 Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Disable, 1: Enable D037/D038/D040/D041 9-234 SM Appendix...
  • Page 769 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed by UCS. LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server. 040 Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD) SM Appendix 9-235 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 770 30: Nothing 046 Initialize All Setting & Addr Clears the local address book information, 047 Initialize Local Addr Book including the user code. Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book Book information, except the user code. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-236 SM Appendix...
  • Page 771 3: Japan Only 4 to 7: Not Used Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case SM Appendix 9-237 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 772 001 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 2: 1/3x 003 Rate for Copy B&W Other 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 004 Rate for Printer Color 5: 1/8x 005 Rate for Printer B&W D037/D038/D040/D041 9-238 SM Appendix...
  • Page 773 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 0000: No access control 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access Ctrl: Device management (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: uAdministration (Lower 4bits) 099 Repository: Download Image - SM Appendix 9-239 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 774 5849 2 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF (No Print) 1: ON (Print) 003 Total Counter [Bluetooth Mode] 5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key. [0:Public] [1: Private] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-240 SM Appendix...
  • Page 775 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. 006 Save to SD Card SM Appendix 9-241 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 776 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 0: OFF, 1: ON 003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step] Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors. 004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-242 SM Appendix...
  • Page 777 1: Yes 022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ] Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated. SM Appendix 9-243 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 778 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Not added, 1: Added 5870 [Common Key Info Writing] Writes to flash ROM the common proof 001 Writing *CTL for validating the device for NRS specifications. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-244 SM Appendix...
  • Page 779 Selects the reboot method for SC. 002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot 5876 [Security Clear] DFU 001 All Clear *ENG 011 Clear NCS Security *ENG SM Appendix 9-245 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 780 [WIM Settings] Web Image Monitor Settings 5885 Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor. 0: OFF, 1: ON Document Server ACC Bit Meaning *CTL Ctrl 0: Forbid all document server access (1) 1: Forbid user mode access (1) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-246 SM Appendix...
  • Page 781 The operation stores. The file is stored in 001 - *CTL a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the machine. SM Appendix 9-247 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 782 This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-248 SM Appendix...
  • Page 783 NIC" is limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication. 001 On Board NIC Other network applications such as NRS, WebImageMonitor, or LDAP/NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2". Even though you can SM Appendix 9-249 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 784 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006 [ADF Adjustment] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-250 SM Appendix...
  • Page 785 Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode. 002 Free Run Duplex Mode [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. SM Appendix 9-251 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 786 Adjusts the staple position for finisher. 6101 + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side. - Value: Moves the staple position to the front side. 001 - [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.2mm/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-252 SM Appendix...
  • Page 787 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. ( “Output Check Table” in this section") SP7-XXX (Data Log) [Total SC Counter] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ] SM Appendix 9-253 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 788 [Total Original Jam Counter] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams. 001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ] [Paper Jam Location] 7504 ON: On check, OFF: Off Check D037/D038/D040/D041 9-254 SM Appendix...
  • Page 789 026 Duplex Reverse: ON *CTL 027 Duplex Entrance: ON *CTL 028 1 Bin Exit Sensor *CTL For details, the "Jam Detection" in the Appendix 051 SEF Sensor 1 *CTL Jam Detection. 052 SEF Sensor 2 *CTL SM Appendix 9-255 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 790 249 Finisher Exit Motor *CTL 250 Finisher Entrance *CTL 251 Finisher Proof Exit *CTL [Original Jam Detection] 7505 Displays the total number of original jams by location. 001 At Power On *CTL 003 Skew Correction: ON D037/D038/D040/D041 9-256 SM Appendix...
  • Page 791 133 A4 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF 160 DLT SEF 164 LG SEF 166 LT SEF 172 HLT SEF 255 Others SM Appendix 9-257 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 792 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 [Original Jam History] 7508 Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams. 001 Latest *CTL 002 Latest-1 003 Latest-2 004 Latest-3 005 Latest-4 006 Latest-5 007 Latest-6 008 Latest-7 009 Latest-8 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-258 SM Appendix...
  • Page 793 Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit. PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated. SM Appendix 9-259 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 794 011 Page: Developer: C 012 Page: Developer: M 013 Page: Developer: Y 014 Page: ITB Unit 015 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit 016 Page: Fusing Unit 017 Page: Fusing Roller 018 Page: Fusing Belt 019 Page:PTR Unit D037/D038/D040/D041 9-260 SM Appendix...
  • Page 795 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation:ITB Unit 044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller SM Appendix 9-261 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 796 067 Rotation (%): Development Unit:M 068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y 069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk 070 Rotation (%): Developer: C 071 Rotation (%): Developer: M 072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y 073 Rotation (%): ITB Unit D037/D038/D040/D041 9-262 SM Appendix...
  • Page 797 Page (%): Development Unit: C 097 Page (%): Development Unit: M 098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y 099 Page (%): Developer: Bk 100 Page (%): Developer: C *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step] SM Appendix 9-263 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 798 PM counter (SP7-803) to “0”. 001 Paper 002 PCU: Bk 003 PCU: C 004 PCU: M 005 PCU: Y 006 PCU: All 007 Development Unit: Bk 008 Development Unit: C 009 Development Unit: M 010 Development Unit: Y D037/D038/D040/D041 9-264 SM Appendix...
  • Page 799 024 PCU T-Collect Bottle 100 All [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams. 001 SC/Jam Clear *CTL 7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only 001 Error Total *CTL 002 Error Staple *CTL SM Appendix 9-265 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 800 [0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step] 002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *CTL [Replacement Counter] 7853 Displays the PM parts replacement number. 001 PCU: Bk *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 002 PCU: C *CTL D037/D038/D040/D041 9-266 SM Appendix...
  • Page 801 Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100 7855 There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001. [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002. SM Appendix 9-267 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 802 Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step ] 001 Page: PCU: Bk 002 Page: PCU: C 003 Page: PCU: M 004 Page: PCU: Y D037/D038/D040/D041 9-268 SM Appendix...
  • Page 803 Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ] 031 Rotation: PCU: Bk 032 Rotation: PCU: C 033 Rotation: PCU: M 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk SM Appendix 9-269 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 804 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ] 061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk 062 Rotation (%): PCU: C 063 Rotation (%): PCU: M 064 Rotation (%): PCU: Y 065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk 066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C D037/D038/D040/D041 9-270 SM Appendix...
  • Page 805 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ] 091 Page (%): PCU: Bk 092 Page (%): PCU: C 093 Page (%): PCU: M 094 Page (%): PCU: Y 095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk 096 Page (%): Development Unit: C SM Appendix 9-271 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 806 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *EGN 003 Brand ID *EGN 004 Area ID *EGN 005 Product ID *EGN 006 Color ID *EGN 007 Maintenance ID *EGN 008 New Product Information *EGN 009 Recycle Counter *EGN D037/D038/D040/D041 9-272 SM Appendix...
  • Page 807 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *EGN 003 Brand ID *EGN 004 Area ID *EGN 005 Product ID *EGN 006 Color ID *EGN 007 Maintenance ID *EGN 008 New Product Information *EGN 009 Recycle Counter *EGN SM Appendix 9-273 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 808 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *EGN 003 Brand ID *EGN 004 Area ID *EGN 005 Product ID *EGN 006 Color ID *EGN 007 Maintenance ID *EGN 008 New Product Information *EGN 009 Recycle Counter *EGN D037/D038/D040/D041 9-274 SM Appendix...
  • Page 809 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *EGN 003 Brand ID *EGN 004 Area ID *EGN 005 Product ID *EGN 006 Color ID *EGN 007 Maintenance ID *EGN 008 New Product Information *EGN 009 Recycle Counter *EGN SM Appendix 9-275 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 810 006 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for Bk. 007 Attachment: Total Counter 008 Refill Information 009 Serial No. *ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for Bk. 010 Attachment Date D037/D038/D040/D041 9-276 SM Appendix...
  • Page 811 *ENG information log 2 for M. 007 Attachment: Total Counter 008 Refill Information 009 Serial No. 010 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 3 for M. 011 Attachment: Total Counter 012 Refill Information SM Appendix 9-277 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 812 010 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 3 for C. 011 Attachment: Total Counter 012 Refill Information 013 Serial No. *ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for C. 014 Attachment Date D037/D038/D040/D041 9-278 SM Appendix...
  • Page 813 *ENG information log 3 for Y. 011 Attachment: Total Counter 012 Refill Information 013 Serial No. 014 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 4 for Y. 015 Attachment: Total Counter 016 Refill Information SM Appendix 9-279 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 814 014 PCU: C *EGN 015 PCU: M *EGN 016 PCU: Y *EGN 017 Development Unit:Bk *EGN 018 Development Unit:C *EGN 019 Development Unit:M *EGN 020 Development Unit:Y *EGN 021 Developer:Bk *EGN 022 Developer:C *EGN 023 Developer:M *EGN D037/D038/D040/D041 9-280 SM Appendix...
  • Page 815 011 Page: Developer: M 012 Page: Developer: Y 013 Page: ITB Unit 014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit 016 Page: Fusing Roller 017 Page: Fusing Belt 018 Page: PTR Unit 031 Rotation: PCU: Bk SM Appendix 9-281 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 816 048 Rotation:PTR Unit 049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle 050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle [PM Yield Setting] 7952 Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit. [0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000 001 Rotation: ITB Unit *EGN mm/step] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-282 SM Appendix...
  • Page 817 022 Day Threshold: PCU: C *EGN These threshold days are used for NRS alarms. 023 Day Threshold: PCU: M *EGN 024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y *EGN Day Threshold: *EGN Development Unit: Bk Day Threshold: *EGN Development Unit: C SM Appendix 9-283 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 818 038 Rotation: PCU: Bk *EGN 039 Rotation: PCU: C [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 040 Rotation: PCU: M 041 Rotation: PCU: Y Rotation: Development [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] *EGN Unit: Bk D037/D038/D040/D041 9-284 SM Appendix...
  • Page 819 [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] Page: Development Unit: M Page: Development Unit: Y 058 Page: Developer: Bk 059 Page: Developer: C *EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 060 Page: Developer: M 061 Page: Developer: Y SM Appendix 9-285 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 820 004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100 005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30 006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55 007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80 008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100 009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30 010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55 011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30 014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55 015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-286 SM Appendix...
  • Page 821 Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an “application”). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean. SM Appendix 9-287 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 822 LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand. Key for Abbreviations Abbreviation What it means “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application D037/D038/D040/D041 9-288 SM Appendix...
  • Page 823 Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page SM Appendix 9-289 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 824 Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. PJob Print Jobs Paper PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam D037/D038/D040/D041 9-290 SM Appendix...
  • Page 825 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] C:Total Jobs *CTL 8 002 Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the F:Total Jobs *CTL 8 003 SM Appendix 9-291 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 826 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-292 SM Appendix...
  • Page 827 8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter increments. When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the SM Appendix 9-293 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 828 These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that 8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network 8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL D037/D038/D040/D041 9-294 SM Appendix...
  • Page 829 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application. C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. SM Appendix 9-295 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 830 Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in 8 06x 4 Booklet staple mode, the Staple counter also increments. Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet 8 06x 5 Z-Fold mode and set for folding (Z-fold). D037/D038/D040/D041 9-296 SM Appendix...
  • Page 831 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (Web 8 077 Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job. SM Appendix 9-297 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 832 Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time. F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 113 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by D037/D038/D040/D041 9-298 SM Appendix...
  • Page 833 The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. SM Appendix 9-299 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 834 Scan Router server. S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-300 SM Appendix...
  • Page 835 If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. SM Appendix 9-301 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 836 A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned. Scans made in SP mode are not counted. Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, D037/D038/D040/D041 9-302 SM Appendix...
  • Page 837 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode 8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode 8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL screen SM Appendix 9-303 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 838 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1. If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-304 SM Appendix...
  • Page 839 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs. SM Appendix 9-305 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 840 8 24x 10: Color 8 24x 11: Other If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-306 SM Appendix...
  • Page 841 8 26x 4 Other 8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used 8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL for delivery functions. SM Appendix 9-307 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 842 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan 8 305 application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445]. 8 306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-308 SM Appendix...
  • Page 843 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned 8 315 by applications that can specify resolution settings. Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts. 8 31x 1 1200dpi < SM Appendix 9-309 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 844 - Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets. - Reports printed to confirm counts. - All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) - Test prints for machine image adjustment. - Error notification reports. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-310 SM Appendix...
  • Page 845 This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 422 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application. SM Appendix 9-311 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 846 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 8 42x 7 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 8 42x 8 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8 42x 9 8> 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up) D037/D038/D040/D041 9-312 SM Appendix...
  • Page 847 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features SM Appendix 9-313 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 848 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax D037/D038/D040/D041 9-314 SM Appendix...
  • Page 849 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other (Standard) 8 44x 255 Other (Custom) SM Appendix 9-315 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 850 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed on one side counts as 1. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy D037/D038/D040/D041 9-316 SM Appendix...
  • Page 851 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 471 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 8 471 1 < 49% 8 471 2 50% to 99% 8 471 3 100% 8 471 4 101% to 200% SM Appendix 9-317 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 852 Color Mode by each 8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL application. 8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL 8 497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL 8 49x 1 B/W 8 49x 2 Single Color 8 49x 3 Two Color D037/D038/D040/D041 9-318 SM Appendix...
  • Page 853 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2 RPDL 8 514 3 8 514 4 8 514 5 8 514 6 GL/GL2 8 514 7 8 514 8 RTIFF SM Appendix 9-319 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 854 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application. S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-320 SM Appendix...
  • Page 855 In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total: Full Color SM Appendix 9-321 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 856 These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output. 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-322 SM Appendix...
  • Page 857 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages 8 591 printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only. SM Appendix 9-323 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 858 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each D037/D038/D040/D041 9-324 SM Appendix...
  • Page 859 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the Scan application only. 8 65x 1 B/W 8 65x 2 Color SM Appendix 9-325 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 860 If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done. The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server. 8 671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-326 SM Appendix...
  • Page 861 8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the 8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL Copy mode screen go to the C: counter. SM Appendix 9-327 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 862 These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode. 8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000 8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single) 8 715 3 PDF 8 715 4 Other 8 725 S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL 8 731 T: Scan to PGS/Media *CTL D037/D038/D040/D041 9-328 SM Appendix...
  • Page 863 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles. 8 781 NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same. SM Appendix 9-329 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 864 8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK 8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y 8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M D037/D038/D040/D041 9-330 SM Appendix...
  • Page 865 8 871 3 M 8 871 4 C Coverage Count: 31%- *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 881 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31% or higher. SM Appendix 9-331 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 866 8 901 4 C Printing PGS: Log: Latest 2 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color. 8 911 1 BK D037/D038/D040/D041 9-332 SM Appendix...
  • Page 867 HDD (while engine is not operating). Engine not operating. Includes time while controller 8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes. SM Appendix 9-333 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 868 8 951 3 Fax Destination registrations. [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] Group destination 8 951 4 Group registrations. Fax relay destination 8 951 5 Transfer Request registrations for relay TX. 8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-334 SM Appendix...
  • Page 869 8 999 3 Copy: BW 8 999 4 Copy: Single Color 8 999 5 Copy: Two Color 8 999 6 Printer Full Color 8 999 7 Printer BW 8 999 8 Printer Single Color 8 999 9 Printer Two Color SM Appendix 9-335 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 870: Input Check Table

    Bit No. 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 Result D037/D038/D040/D041 9-336 SM Appendix...
  • Page 871 5803 15 Zero Cross Not detected Detected 5803 16 Regist Sensor Paper detected No paper detected Actuator not 5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk Actuator detected detected Actuator not 5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color Actuator detected detected SM Appendix 9-337 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 872 5803 38 ITB Contact HP Sensor HP (Contact) (not contact) 5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Not set 5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Not set 5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn Full Not full D037/D038/D040/D041 9-338 SM Appendix...
  • Page 873 Normal No paper 5803 70 R-Tray Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 71 R-Tray Set Sensor Not set No paper 5803 72 1-Bin:Transport Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 73 1-Bin:Paper Sensor Paper detected No paper SM Appendix 9-339 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 874 5803 91 2T PFU:Lower PE Sn Not end No paper 5803 92 2T PFU:V-Transport Sn Paper detected detected 5803 94 LD OFF Check:Factory 5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP 5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close D037/D038/D040/D041 9-340 SM Appendix...
  • Page 875 ADF cover open 6007 16 Lift Up Sn ADF cover close ADF cover open Internal Finisher (D429) Reading 6120 Description 6120 1 Staple Slide HP Sensor Not HP 6120 2 Punch Slide HP Sensor Not HP SM Appendix 9-341 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 876 6120 22 Paper Width Sensor:16K Paper not detected Paper detected 6120 23 Paper Width Sensor:B5 Paper not detected Paper detected 6120 24 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Full Not full 6120 25 Tray Upper Sensor Upper Not upper D037/D038/D040/D041 9-342 SM Appendix...
  • Page 877 8.5" x 11" SEF B5 SEF B5 SEF 11" x 81/2" LEF* A4 LEF* (A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF) 10.5" x 7.25" LEF* B5 LEF* (B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF) A5 LEF A5 LEF SM Appendix 9-343 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 878 A3 SEF LT LEF A4 LEF *1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001. Table 3: APS Original Size Detection Length Original Size Width Sensor Sensor SP4-301 display Inch Metric version version D037/D038/D040/D041 9-344 SM Appendix...
  • Page 879 A3 SEF* (A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF) 8.5" x 14" SEF B4 SEF (B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF) A4 SEF A4 SEF B5 SEF B5 SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF SM Appendix 9-345 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 880: Output Check Table

    2: 2 Holes, 2/3: 2/3 Holes, 4 (EU): 4 Holes Europe, 4 (Scan.): 4 Holes Scandinavia 4 (EU) 4 (Scan.) 6120-013 Punch Unit:Area Detect2 6120-014 Punch Unit:Area Detect2 9.1.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE Copier 5804 Display Description 5804 1 Paper Feed M1:CW:190mm/s 5804 2 Paper Feed M1:CW:120mm/s D037/D038/D040/D041 9-346 SM Appendix...
  • Page 881 5804 17 Bypass M:CW:190mm/s 5804 18 Bypass M:CW:120mm/s 5804 19 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:400mA 5804 20 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:300mA 5804 21 Bypass M:CCW:190mm/s 5804 22 Bypass M:CCW:120mm/s 5804 23 Bypass M:CCW:60mm/s 5804 24 Registration M:120mm/s 5804 25 Registration M:60mm/s SM Appendix 9-347 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 882 5804 46 Color Dev. M:60mm/s 5804 47 Color Drum. M:120mm/s 5804 48 Color Drum. M:60mm/s 5804 49 Bk Drum M:120mm/s 5804 50 Bk Drum M:60mm/s 5804 51 ITB Motor:120mm/s 5804 52 ITB Motor:60mm/s 5804 53 Fusing/P-Exit M:120mm/s D037/D038/D040/D041 9-348 SM Appendix...
  • Page 883 5804 71 Toner Supply M:Bk 5804 72 Toner Supply M:C 5804 73 Toner Supply M:M 5804 74 Toner Supply M:Y 5804 75 PCU T-Collect Motor 5804 76 ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter Motor 5804 77 ITB Contact Motor SM Appendix 9-349 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 884 5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk 5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C 5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M 5804 95 HVPS:Charge DC:Y 5804 96 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Bk 5804 97 HVPS:Dev. Bias:C 5804 98 HVPS:Dev. Bias:M 5804 99 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Y 5804 100 HVPS:PTR Bias:- PWM D037/D038/D040/D041 9-350 SM Appendix...
  • Page 885 5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M 5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL 5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL 5804 128 2T PFU:Upper Feed CL 5804 129 2T PFU:Lower Feed CL 5804 130 2T PFU:P-Feed M:190mm/s 5804 131 2T PFU:P-Feed M:120mm/s SM Appendix 9-351 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 886 5804 216 LD1: Bk 5804 218 LDI: C 5804 220 LD1: M 5804 222 LD1: Y Internal Finisher (D429) 6121 Description Description 6121 1 Transport Motor 6121 2 Front Jogger Motor 6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor D037/D038/D040/D041 9-352 SM Appendix...
  • Page 887 Feed Motor-Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor: Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation Transport Motor: Forward Transport Motor- Reverse rotation 6008 6 Relay Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Reverse rotation 6008 9 Feed Clutch 6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid SM Appendix 9-353 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 888 Press the "Start" key to start the test print. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display. Reset all settings to the default values. 10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode. D037/D038/D040/D041 9-354 SM Appendix...
  • Page 889 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal) Grid Vertical Line Band (Horizontal) Grid Horizontal Line Band (Vertical) Grid Pattern Small Checkered Flag Pattern Grid Pattern Large Grayscale (Vertical Margin) Argyle Patter Small Grayscale (Horizontal Margin) Argyle Patter Large Full Dot Pattern SM Appendix 9-355 D037/D038/D040/D041...

  • Page 890: Printer Service Mode

    [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the printable area. 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 2 bit 0 bit 1 D037/D038/D040/D041 9-356 SM Appendix...
  • Page 891 Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A" bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 SM Appendix 9-357 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 892 Enable (1000) to 1000 jobs. (100) Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100. bit 5 Disable Enable Face-up output D037/D038/D040/D041 9-358 SM Appendix...
  • Page 893 Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code. bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 [PS]: Orientation Auto Detect Function Enable Disable Disable: Automatically chooses page orientations of PostScript jobs (Landscape or Portrait) based on the content printed on the page. SM Appendix 9-359 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 894 When you select “1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967. [Data Recall] 1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting. 1101 1 Factory *CTL D037/D038/D040/D041 9-360 SM Appendix...
  • Page 895 1104 1 Black: Highlight *CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ] 1104 2 Black: Shadow 1104 3 Black: Middle 1104 4 Black: IDmax 1104 21 Cyan: Highlight 1104 22 Cyan: Shadow 1104 23 Cyan: Middle SM Appendix 9-361 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 896 “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storage location. 1105 1 Save Tone Control Value [Toner Limit] 1106 Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. 1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-362 SM Appendix...
  • Page 897 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 1010 *CTL Light PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display 1010 1 Enable or disable remote scan. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 1011 [Org count Disp] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF SM Appendix 9-363 D037/D038/D040/D041...
  • Page 898 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ] *CTL 2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] D037/D038/D040/D041 9-364 SM Appendix...
  • Page 899 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D331 D331 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 901 PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D331 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER ................1 1.1.1 COVERS....................1 1.1.2 FEED ROLLER ..................2 1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS ................3 1.2.1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH............... 3 1.2.2 LOWER FEED CLUTCH..............3 1.2.3 RELAY CLUTCH..................
  • Page 903 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 905: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers and Roller 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. 1.1.1 COVERS Rear Cover Hold brackets [A] ( x 1 each) Rear cover [B] ( x 3) Right Cover...

  • Page 906: Feed Roller

    Covers and Roller 1.1.2 FEED ROLLER Pull out the tray [A]. Release the lock lever [B]. Feed roller [C] D331...

  • Page 907: Drive Components

    Drive Components 1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. 1.2.1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH Rear cover ( "Covers") Bracket [A] ( x 2) Hold bracket [B] ( x 1, bushing x 1) Upper feed clutch [C] ( x 1)

  • Page 908: Relay Clutch

    Drive Components 1.2.3 RELAY CLUTCH Rear cover ( "Covers") Relay clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1) 1.2.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( "Covers") Tray main board ( "Tray Main Board") Gear [A] ( x 1) Paper feed motor bracket [B] ( x 5) Paper feed motor [C] ( x 2)

  • Page 909: Lift Motors

    Drive Components 1.2.5 LIFT MOTORS Upper Lift Motor Rear cover ( "Covers") Spring [A] (snap ring x 1, spacer x 1) Lift motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1) Upper lift motor [C] ( x 3) Lower Lift Motor Rear cover ( "Covers") Spring (snap ring x 1, spacer x 1)

  • Page 910: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. 1.3.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR Open the tray cover [A] Guide plate [B] ( x 2) Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1) Vertical transport sensor [D] (hooks)

  • Page 911: Paper End Sensor

    Electrical Components 1.3.2 PAPER END SENSOR Pull out the tray [A] Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) Paper end sensor [C] (hooks) 1.3.3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS Pull out the two trays. Sensor bracket cover [A] ( x 1) Sensor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 2)

  • Page 912: Tray Main Board

    Electrical Components 1.3.4 TRAY MAIN BOARD Rear cover ( "Covers") Tray main board [A] ( x 4, all D331...

  • Page 913: Detailed Section Descriptions

    Component Layout 2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1. Upper paper feed roller 5. Lower tray 2. Lower paper feed roller 6. Upper tray 3. Lower bottom plate 7. Upper bottom plate 4. Optional tray heater D331...

  • Page 914: Electrical Component Layout

    Component Layout 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1. Paper feed motor 12. Lower paper height 1 sensor 2. Upper lift sensor 13. Vertical transport sensor 3. Upper lift motor 14. Lower tray set switch 4. Upper tray set switch 15. Lower paper end sensor 5.
  • Page 915 Component Layout Motors Paper Feed Drives all rollers. Upper Lift Lifts the upper tray bottom plate. Lower Lift Lifts the lower tray bottom plate. Sensors Detects when the paper in the upper tray is at Upper Lift the correct feed height. Detects when the paper in the lower tray is at Lower Lift the correct feed height.
  • Page 916 Component Layout Size Switches Tray Cover Detects whether the tray cover is opened or not. Detects whether the upper tray is opened or Upper Tray Set not. Lower Tray Set Detects whether the lower tray is opened or not. Magnetic Clutches Upper Paper Starts paper feed from the upper tray.

  • Page 917: Drive Layout

    Component Layout 2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1. Paper feed motor 5. Lower paper feed clutch 2. Drive belt 6. Upper paper feed roller 3. Upper paper feed clutch 7. Relay roller 4. Relay clutch 8. Lower paper feed roller D331...

  • Page 918: Paper Feed And Separation Mechanism

    Paper Feed and Separation Mechanism 2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time.

  • Page 919: Paper Lift Mechanism

    Paper Lift Mechanism 2.3 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in. When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D].
  • Page 920 Paper Lift Mechanism the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original position. D331...

  • Page 921: Paper End Detection

    Paper End Detection 2.4 PAPER END DETECTION If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.

  • Page 922: Paper Height Detection

    Paper Height Detection 2.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the actuator up.

  • Page 923: Paper Size Detection

    Paper Size Detection 2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION There are three paper size sensors [A] (SN1, SN2 and SN3) on the paper tray unit. Each paper tray has its own actuator [B], with a unique combination of notches. This actuator is moved when the paper end fence [C] is adjusted for the installed paper.
  • Page 924 Paper Size Detection A3 SEF 420 x 297 DLT SEF NA Size SP Setting A6 SEF 148 x 105 A5 LEF B5 LEF 182 x 257 Exe LEF/ B6 SEF A4 LEF/ A5 SEF/ HLT LT LEF 210 x 297 B5 SEF 257 x 182 LT SEF...

  • Page 925: Side And End Fences

    Side and End Fences 2.7 SIDE AND END FENCES 2.7.1 SIDE FENCES If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it.
  • Page 927 ARDF DF3030 D366 D366 ARDF DF3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 929 ARDF DF3030 D366 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS AND TRAY..................1 1.1.1 REAR COVER ..................1 1.1.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY..........1 1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS ............2 1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................ 2 1.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER ................
  • Page 930 2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION ............... 21 2.2.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ..........22 2.2.6 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION ..........23 3. SERVICE TABLES.................25 3.1 DIP SWITCHES ..................25 D366...

  • Page 931: Symbols Used In This Manual

    Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 933: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers and Tray 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS AND TRAY 1.1.1 REAR COVER Open the left cover [A]. Open the original tray [B]. Rear cover [C] ( x 1, hook x 6) 1.1.2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY Open the left cover. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") Front cover [A] (...

  • Page 934: Document Feed Components

    Document Feed Components 1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS 1.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT Open the left cover. Original feed unit [A]. 1.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER Open the left cover. Original feed unit ( "Original Feed Unit") Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1) D366...

  • Page 935: Feed Belt

    Document Feed Components 1.2.3 FEED BELT Open the left cover. Original feed unit ( "Original Feed Unit") Feed belt cover [A] (spring x 1) When reassembling the feed belt cover, make sure that the projection [B] of the feed belt cover is on the guide plate rear [C]. Belt tension unit [D] D366...

  • Page 936: Separation Roller

    Document Feed Components Feed belt [E] 1.2.4 SEPARATION ROLLER Open the left cover. Separation roller cover [A]. Separation roller [B] ( x 1) D366...

  • Page 937: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1.3.1 ARDF DRIVE BOARD AND DF POSITION SENSOR Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") ARDF drive board [A] ( x 3, all DF position sensor with bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) DF position sensor [C] (hook x 2) 1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR Original Tray (see "Front Cover and Original Tray")

  • Page 938: Original Set Sensor

    Electrical Components Original trailing edge sensor [B] ( x 1) Original length sensors [C] ( x 1 each) 1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR Open the left cover. Original feed unit (see the "Original Feed Unit") Original Tray (see the "Original Tray") Original feed-in guide plate [A] ( x 3).

  • Page 939: Stamp Solenoid And Original Exit Sensor

    Electrical Components x 1, x 1) 1.3.5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR Open the ARDF. Remove the left edge of the platen sheet. Release the hook [A]. Open the original exit guide plate [B] Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1, x 1) Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1, hook x 1)

  • Page 940: Original Feed Drive

    Original Feed Drive 1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 1.4.1 FEED MOTOR Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") Feed motor with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1) Feed motor [B] ( x 2) 1.4.2 PICK-UP SOLENOID Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") Harness guide [A] (all D366...

  • Page 941: Inverter Solenoid

    Original Feed Drive Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 2, x 1) 1.4.3 INVERTER SOLENOID Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") Harness guide (see "Pick-up Solenoid") Inverter solenoid [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, gear x 1, gear cover x 1) D366...

  • Page 942: Feed Clutch

    Original Feed Drive 1.4.4 FEED CLUTCH Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") Harness guide (see "Pick-up Solenoid") Bracket [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 1, bushing x 1, spring x 1) Slide the bracket. Feed clutch [B] ( x 1) D366...

  • Page 943: Transport Motor

    Original Feed Drive 1.4.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR Rear cover (see "Rear Cover") Harness guide (see "Pick-up Solenoid") Left cover sensor with bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Transport motor with bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1) Transport motor [C] ( x 2) D366...

  • Page 944: Detailed Descriptions

    Component Layout 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1. Separation Roller 10. Junction Gate 2. Paper Feed Belt 11. Exit Roller 3. Pick-up Roller 12. Original Exit Sensor 4. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 13. Transport Roller 5.

  • Page 945: Electrical Component Layout

    Component Layout 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT Sensors 1. Original Width Sensor 2. Skew Correction Sensor 3. Registration Sensor 4. Cover Sensor 5. Original Set Sensor 6. Exit Sensor 7. Original Sensor 8. Original Length Sensor 9. DF Position Sensor D366...

  • Page 946: Electrical Component Descriptions

    Component Layout Drive Components 1. Transport Motor 2. Feed Clutch 3. Pick-up Solenoid 4. Inverter Solenoid 5. Feed Motor 6. Main Board Electrical Component Descriptions Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and Feed reverse table rollers. Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers Sensors...
  • Page 947 Component Layout Original Width Detects the original width - S. Sensor - S Original Width Detects the original width - M. Sensor - M Original Width Detects the original width - L. Sensor - L Original Width Detects the original width - LL. Sensor - LL Original Length - Detects the original length - S.

  • Page 948: Drive Layout

    Component Layout PCBs Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier, PCB1 Main and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid and motor drive signals from the copier. 2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1. Feed Motor 2. Pick-up Roller 3. Separation Roller 4. Feed Belt 5.

  • Page 949: Basic Operation

    Basic Operation 2.2 BASIC OPERATION 2.2.1 ORIGINAL SET AND SIZE DETECTION The original set sensor [A] detects if the original is set or not. The original sensor [B] detects if the original is on the original tray or not (this lets the machine know as early as possible, whether there is another original on the tray).

  • Page 950: Mixed Original Size Mode

    Basic Operation 11" x 15"/SEF 10" x 14"/SEF 8.5" x 14"/SEF (LG) 8.5" x 13"/SEF (F4) 8.25" x 13"/SEF 8" x 13"/SEF (F) 8.5" x 11"/SEF (LT) 8.5" x 11"/LEF (LT) 7.25" x 10.5"/SEF (US EXE) 10.5" x 7.25"/SEF (US EXE) 10"...
  • Page 951 Basic Operation Document length detection From when the skew correction sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the original. Feed-in cycle When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the original’s length has been accurately detected.

  • Page 952: Pick-Up And Separation

    Basic Operation 2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator and the original set sensor is activated. After pressing the start button, the feed clutch is activated and the original feed unit [A] moves down.

  • Page 953: Skew Correction

    Basic Operation 2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION When an original is fed into the feeder, the feed motor [B] rotates forwards. At this time, the feed belt turns but the skew correction roller [C] does not. Because of this, when the leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller, skew in the original is removed. A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor [A], the feed motor [B] turns off for 40 ms and rotates in reverse.

  • Page 954: Original Transport And Exit

    Basic Operation 2.2.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT Single-Sided Originals The feed motor feeds the separated original to the skew correction roller [A] at maximum speed. After skew correction, the feed and transport motors feed the original through the scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [B] and DF exposure glass [C]).

  • Page 955: Conditions For Jam Detection

    Basic Operation towards the inverter table. Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor, the junction gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [E] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the inverter table, the feed motor switches on in reverse. The original is then fed by the inverter roller [F], and then by the skew correction roller [A] and registration roller [B] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
  • Page 956 Basic Operation The skew correction sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by the maximum length of the original + 150 mm after the skew correction sensor turned on. Sensor stays The registration sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by on too long its length x 1.5 after the registration sensor turned on.

  • Page 957: Service Tables

    Dip Switches 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCHES DIP-SW Function Normal operating mode (Default) Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: No original: One-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: No original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 32% speed Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 32% speed Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 70% speed...
  • Page 959 Internal Shift Tray SH3040 (D388) D388 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY PB3040 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 961 Internal Shift Tray SH3040 (D388) TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 TRAY COVER....................1 – When Attaching the Tray Cover – ............1 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD........2...
  • Page 963 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...
  • Page 965 Tray Cover 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 TRAY COVER Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of the cover. – When Attaching the Tray Cover – The right side of the tray cover should be attached first. Fit the pawls [C] on the shift tray.
  • Page 966 Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD Top cover ( p.1 "Tray Cover") Slip disc [A] Tray motor [B] ( x 1) Half turn sensor board [C] ( x 1). D388...
  • Page 967 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 D425 D425 ONE BIN TRAY BN3070 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 969 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3070 D425 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER ................1 1.1.1 COVERS....................1 1.1.2 FEED ROLLER ..................1 1.2 MOTORS AND CLUTCH ................2 1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ................ 2 1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR................. 3 1.2.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH...............

  • Page 971: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers and Roller 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS AND ROLLER 1.1.1 COVERS Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each) Rear cover [B] ( x 2) Rear right cover [C] ( x 1) 1.1.2 FEED ROLLER Pull out the tray [A] Release the lock lever [B] Feed roller [C] D425...

  • Page 972: Motors And Clutch

    Motors and Clutch 1.2 MOTORS AND CLUTCH Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. 1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR Rear Cover ( Rear Cover) Release the harness [B] ( x 2).
  • Page 973 Motors and Clutch Paper feed motor bracket [A] ( x 3) Paper feed motor [B] 1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR Pull out the Tray. Rear cover ( Rear Cover) Rear right cover ( Rear Right Cover) Stay [A] ( x 2) Rear right bracket [A] ( x 1) Tray end cover [B] ( x 1,...

  • Page 974: Paper Feed Clutch

    Motors and Clutch Transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) 1.2.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH Rear Cover ( Rear Cover) Rear right bracket ( Transport Motor) Paper feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1) 1.2.4 MAIN BOARD Rear cover ( Rear Cover) Main board [A] (All...

  • Page 975: Sensors And Board

    Sensors and Board 1.3 SENSORS AND BOARD Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. 1.3.1 PAPER END SENSOR Pull out the tray [A] Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) Paper end sensor [C] (hooks) 1.3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSORS...

  • Page 976: Tray Main Board

    Sensors and Board 1.3.3 TRAY MAIN BOARD Rear cover ( Rear Cover) Main board [A] (All x 4) D425...
  • Page 977 1 BIN TRAY BN3060 D426 D426 ONE BIN TRAY BN3060 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 979 1 BIN TRAY BN3060 D426 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..............1 1.1.1 1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR ......1 When reinstalling these sensors.............. 2 1.1.2 1-BIN TRAY CONTROL BOARD ............2 1.1.3 LED BOARD ..................
  • Page 981 Electrical Components 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1.1.1 1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER SENSOR 1-Bin tray unit 1-bin tray bottom cover [A] ( x 2) Sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2) D426...
  • Page 982 Electrical Components Sensors; [A]: Paper sensor ( x 1) [B]: 1-bin tray exit sensor (hooks) When reinstalling these sensors Both sensors have a 3-pin connector. Be careful to connect the correct harnesses from the 1-bin tray control board to each sensor. The blue connector from the 1-bin tray control board must be connected to the paper sensor.
  • Page 983 Electrical Components 1.1.3 LED BOARD 1-bin tray unit 1-bin tray bottom cover ( 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor and Paper Sensor) LED board ( x 1, x 1) D426...
  • Page 985 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 D427 D427 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 987 SIDE TRAY TYPE C2550 D427 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..............1 1.1.1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR ..............1 1.1.2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR................1 1.1.3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID............2 1.1.4 SIDE TRAY BOARD ................3 D427...

  • Page 989: Replacement And Adjustment

    Electrical Components 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1.1.1 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR Side tray paper exit unit Sensor assembly [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 1) Side tray exit sensor [A] (hooks)] 1.1.2 SIDE TRAY MOTOR Side tray paper exit unit D427...

  • Page 990: Side Tray Gate Solenoid

    Electrical Components Side tray upper cover [A] ( x 2, tab [B]) Release the tab [B] with a flat-head screwdriver. Side tray motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 1.1.3 SIDE TRAY GATE SOLENOID Side tray paper exit unit Side tray upper cover ( Side Tray Motor) D427...

  • Page 991: Side Tray Board

    Electrical Components Side tray gate solenoid assembly [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) Side tray gate solenoid [A] ( x 2, spring x 1) 1.1.4 SIDE TRAY BOARD Side tray paper exit unit Side tray upper cover ( Side Tray Motor) Side tray board [A] ( x 1,...
  • Page 993 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 D428 D428 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 995 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3030 D428 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 TRAY COVER....................1 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD........2 D428...
  • Page 997 Tray Cover 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 TRAY COVER Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of the cover. – When Attaching the Tray Cover – The right side of the tray cover should be attached first. Fit the pawls [C] on the shift tray.
  • Page 998 Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD Top cover ( Tray Cover) Slip disc [A] Tray motor [B] ( x 1) Half turn sensor board [C] ( x 1). D428...
  • Page 999 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 D429 D429 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 1001 INTERNAL FINISHER TYPE C2550 D429 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ................1 1.1.1 REAR, LEFT REAR AND REAR INNER COVER ........ 1 1.1.2 FRONT COVER................... 2 1.1.3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER COVER............2 When installing the output tray lower cover ..........2 1.1.4 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT ................
  • Page 1003 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 1005: Replacement And Adjustment

    Common Procedures 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES The finisher must be removed from the machine for these procedures except "Output Tray Lower Cover" removal procedure. The following covers cannot be removed while the finisher is attached to the machine. 1.1.1 REAR, LEFT REAR AND REAR INNER COVER Rear cover [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 1006: Front Cover

    Common Procedures 1.1.2 FRONT COVER Remove the knob [A] Front cover [B] ( x 2) 1.1.3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER COVER Output tray lower cover [A] ( x 3) When installing the output tray lower cover The two projections [A] of the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to D429...

  • Page 1007: Output Tray Unit

    Common Procedures the output tray lower cover) must be inserted along with two guide rails [B] inside the output tray unit. Push the slide plate [A] to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed. The left side picture shows the correct result and right side picture shows the incorrect result.
  • Page 1008 Common Procedures Disconnect the harness [A] (CN10), and make some slack in the cable. Output tray unit [A] D429...

  • Page 1009: Motors

    Motors 1.2 MOTORS 1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR Front cover ( Front Cover) Loosen the harness guide [A] ( x 2) Bracket with pick-up roller contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) Pick-up roller contact motor [B] ( x 2) 1.2.2 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MOTOR Front cover ( Front Cover)
  • Page 1010 Motors Bracket with stapler unit movement motor [A] ( x 2, spring x 1, belt) Two gears [A] ( x 1) Stapler unit movement motor [A] ( x 2) D429...

  • Page 1011: Stapler Unit

    Stapler Unit 1.3 STAPLER UNIT Front cover ( Front Cover) White lever [A] (spring x 1, hook) Black lever [B] (hook) Shaft [A] ( x 1) Remove the green stapler cartridge first, to make this step more easy. Move the stapler unit [A] to the center. Stand the internal finisher [B] as shown above.
  • Page 1012 Stapler Unit Note: Make sure that the end fences [A] are placed as shown above when replacing the stapler unit. Move the stapler unit to the rear side, and then remove the stapler unit [A] ( x 2). D429...

  • Page 1013: Sensors

    Sensors 1.4 SENSORS 1.4.1 MAIN UNIT Relay Sensor Relay sensor [A] (hook, x 1) Belt Roller Position Sensor Rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover) Front cover ( Front Cover) Top bracket [A] ( x 6) D429...

  • Page 1014: Stapler Safety Sensor

    Sensors Belt roller position sensor with the bracket [A] ( x 1) Belt roller position sensor [B] (hook, x 1) Stapler Safety Sensor Stapler unit ( Stapler Unit) Stapler safety sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) Stapler Unit HP Sensor Front cover ( Front Cover) Bracket with stapler unit HP sensor (...

  • Page 1015: Inverter Unit

    Sensors 1.4.2 INVERTER UNIT Entrance Sensor Bracket with entrance sensor ( x 1) Entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) D429...

  • Page 1016: Fan

    1.5 FAN 1.5.1 FRONT FAN Front fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) D429...

  • Page 1017: Main Board

    Main Board 1.6 MAIN BOARD Rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover) Left rear cover ( Rear, Left Rear and Rear Inner Cover) Main board ( x 2, clip x 2, x all) D429...

  • Page 1018: Punch Unit

    Punch Unit 1.7 PUNCH UNIT The punch unit must be removed from the internal finisher for this procedure. 1.7.1 PUNCH SLIDER UNIT Brackets [A] and ground plate [B] at the right side of the punch unit ( x 1 each) Brackets [A] at the left side of the punch unit ( x 1 each) Harness bracket [A] (...
  • Page 1019 Punch Unit Positioning pins [A] ( x 3, spring) Punch slider unit [A] ( x all) D429...
  • Page 1021 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550/C2530 D432/D433 D432/D433 FAX OPTION TYPE C2550/C2530 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New 10/05/2009 Error Code 31-21 added. 12/12/2008 Service Ram Addresses 02/02/2009 Service Ram Addresses 12/12/2008 Service Ram Addresses...
  • Page 1023 1.2.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........6 1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS................... 10 1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) (D432 ONLY)..........10 1.3.2 HANDSET (B433) ................10 D037/D041 with the internal finisher............13 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........14 2.1 FCU......................14 3. TROUBLESHOOTING ..............15 3.1 ERROR CODES ..................
  • Page 1024 4.2 SERVICE TABLES..................47 4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) ............... 47 4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA) ..............48 4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) ............48 4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)............. 49 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)..............49 4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ............... 50 4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)................52 4.3 BIT SWITCHES...................
  • Page 1025 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 1027: Installation Procedure

    Fax Option (D432) Installation 1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1.1 FAX OPTION (D432) INSTALLATION This fax option is only used for D038/D041 models. 1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty G3 Decal Ferrite Core Serial Number Decal Fax Keytop...

  • Page 1028: Fax Option Installation Procedure

    Fax Option (D432) Installation 1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Before installation, print out all data in the printer buffer. Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power LED is off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 1029 Fax Option (D432) Installation Press down the MBU [A]. Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC672 occurs. Remove the jumper [B] (set to OFF) and set it to ON. The machine may issue SC819 or SC820 if the jumper is not set to "ON" correctly.
  • Page 1030 Fax Option (D432) Installation A telephone cord with the ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE" jack. Only for NA models: Install the TEL cap in the "TEL" jack if the handset will not be installed.
  • Page 1031 Fax Option (D432) Installation 14. Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit. 15. Enter the correct country code with SP1101-016 (System SW 0F, Country/area code for functional settings). 16. Exit the SP mode, and turn the machine off and on. D432/D433...

  • Page 1032: Fax Option (D433) Installation

    Fax Option (D433) Installation 1.2 FAX OPTION (D433) INSTALLATION This fax option is only used for D037/D040 models. 1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty G3 Decal Serial Number Decal...
  • Page 1033 Fax Option (D433) Installation The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet. Remove the FCU cover [A] ( x 2). Press down the MBU [A]. Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC672 occurs. Remove the jumper [B] (set to OFF) and set it to ON.
  • Page 1034 Fax Option (D433) Installation Install the FCU [A] ( x 2; removed in step 3). Write the serial number of the fax unit on the serial number decal, and then attach this decal to the bracket [B] of the fax unit. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE"...
  • Page 1035 Fax Option (D433) Installation 12. Attach the Super G3 decal [A]. 13. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch. After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to clear the message.

  • Page 1036: Fax Unit Options

    Fax Unit Options 1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) (D432 ONLY) Remove the FCU from the machine. Install the memory option [A] on the FCU. Reinstall the FCU in the machine. 1.3.2 HANDSET (B433) The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only. Remove the screw [A] first, and the rear cover [B] ( x7).
  • Page 1037 Fax Unit Options Remove the scanner left cover [C] ( x 2). Make two holes [D] in the scanner left cover. Attach the handset support bracket [E] inside the scanner left cover. D432/D433...
  • Page 1038 Fax Unit Options Secure the handset bracket [F] ( x 2: M3x6 in the accesories of the FCU option). Reattach the scanner left cover to the machine. Remove the label [G] from the handset cradle [H]. Attach the cradle to the handset bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

  • Page 1039: D037/D041 With The Internal Finisher

    10. Put the ferrite core [I] on the handset core as shown. The length [J] must be 60 mm. 11. Connect the handset cable to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine. D037/D041 with the internal finisher Do steps from 1 to 9 in the “Handset (B433)” installation procedure.

  • Page 1040: Replacement And Adjustment

    2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 FCU When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer Setting >...

  • Page 1041: Troubleshooting

    Error Codes 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report. Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action...
  • Page 1042 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode Check the line connection. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable Modem training fails even equalizer. 0-05 G3 shifts down to 2400 Replace the FCU.
  • Page 1043 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have a defective modem/FCU; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems and noise. Cross reference Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode...
  • Page 1044 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Cross reference See error code 0-08. Check the line connection. Replace the FCU. Check for line problems. Facsimile data not Try calling another fax machine. 0-20 received within 6 s of Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the retraining first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
  • Page 1045 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Check for line noise or other line problems. Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx error criteria. Cross reference Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1 Check the line connection.
  • Page 1046 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action not available was a V.34 data modem and not a fax (V.8 calling and called modem.) terminal) A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal.
  • Page 1047 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The line was disconnected The guard timer expired while starting these 0-80 due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or phase 2 – line probing. low signal level can cause these errors. The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal: due to a timeout in V.34...
  • Page 1048 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary primary channel. channel was not successful. This does not result in an error communication. The line was disconnected because PPR was Try using a lower data rate at the start. 0-88 transmitted/received 9 Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
  • Page 1049 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace 2-50 for a fatal FCU system the FCU. error The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace 2-51 because of a fatal the FCU.
  • Page 1050 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Replace the FCU. G3 ECM - T1 time out 6-00 during reception of facsimile data Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer. G3 ECM - no V.21 signal Replace the FCU. 6-01 was received G3 ECM - EOR was 6-02 received Check the line connection.
  • Page 1051 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action received at the other end Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or after all communication the dedicated tx parameter for that address). attempts at 2400 bps Check the line connection. Defective remote terminal. V.21 flag detected during The other terminal may be defective or 6-21...
  • Page 1052 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action system administrator is not registered. Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout) because the server could not be found. The PC is not ready to transfer files. 14-01 SMTP Connection Failed SMTP server not functioning correctly. The DNS IP address is not registered.
  • Page 1053 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action problem at the destination at that the settings at the destination are correct. Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly 14-04 Denied (550) Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full.
  • Page 1054 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. Data Send to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly 14-08 Failed (5XX) Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Software application error. POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization Authorization Failed for 14-09...
  • Page 1055 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action software. Update the software because of the defective 14-17 Incorrect Ticket software. The access to MCS file is denied due to the no permission of access. 14-18 Access to MCS File Error Update the software because of the defective software.
  • Page 1056 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Address book was being edited during creation of the notification mail. Software error. Not even one return notification can be downloaded: UCS Destination The address book was being edited. 14-51 Download Error The number for the specified destination does not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was created).
  • Page 1057 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Network not operating correctly. POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed: Incorrect IFAX user name or password. 15-12 Authorization Error Access was attempted by another device, such as the PC. POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect. Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission cannot be received due to 15-13 Receive Buffer Full...
  • Page 1058 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting. The delivery destination address was 15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF. Format error in the address of the Off Ramp 15-43 Address Format Error Gateway.
  • Page 1059 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Software error. The file could not be received because the 15-71 Not Binary Image Data attachment was not binary image data. Could not find the Disposition line in the 15-73 MDN Status Error header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware.
  • Page 1060 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer request, because the ID code in the 15-94 Incorrect ID Code incoming e-mail did not match the ID code registered in the machine. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for 15-95 Transfer Station Function transfer because the transfer function was...
  • Page 1061 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action transmission error occurred F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU. Update the SG3 modem ROM. Replace the SG3 board. F6-xx SG3 modem error Check for line noise or other line problems. Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax. D432/D433...

This manual is also suitable for:

D038D040D041Mpc 2050Aficio mp c2030Aficio mp c2050 ... Show all

Table of Contents